BENTLEY

FLOWMASTER
CONNECT EDITION
USER ’S GUIDE
Copyright © 2018 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

This documentation is published by Bentley Systems, Inc. (“Bentley”), and is intended solely for
use in conjunction with Bentley’s software. This documentation is available to all current
Licensees in print and electronic format. No one may copy, photocopy, reproduce, translate, or
convert to any electronic or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, the printed documentation
without the prior written approval of Bentley. Licensee may download the electronic
documentation from Bentley’s web site and make that documentation available solely on
licensee’s intranet. Licensee may print the electronic documentation, in part or in whole, for
personal use. No one may translate, alter, sell, or make available the electronic documentation on
the Internet, transfer the documentation by FTP, or display any of the documentation on any web
site without the prior written approval of Bentley.

Trademarks

Bentley, ProjectWise, ClientCare, CulvertMaster, Cybernet, Darwin, FlowMaster, Graphical HEC-

1, Bentley Systems, PondPack, PumpMaster, SewerCAD, SewerGEMS, StormCAD, WaterCAD,
and WaterGEMS, CivilStorm, HEC-Pack, HAMMER, and GISConnect are registered or
unregistered trademarks of Bentley Systems, Inc. or one its direct or indirect wholly-owned
subsidiaries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Visual Studio, Word, and Excel, are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other brands, company or product names, or trademarks
belong to their respective holders.

Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Haestad Methods Solution Center
Suite 200W
27 Siemon Company Drive
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
E-mail: support@[Link]
Internet: [Link]
 Contents

Chapter 1: Orientation 1
Using the Bentley FlowMaster Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Checking Your Current Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Contacting Bentley Systems about Haestad Methods Products . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
SUPPORT HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Your Suggestions Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Chapter 2: Tutorials 7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Tutorial 1—Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Tutorial 2—Gradually Varied Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Tutorial 3—Results Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Chapter 3: Bentley FlowMaster Environment 23

Welcome Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Project Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Engineering Library Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Analysis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Contents-i

 Window Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Customizing Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Analysis Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Worksheets Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Help Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Create New Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Rectangular Channel Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—RECTANGULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—RECTANGULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Triangular Channel Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—TRIANGULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—TRIANGULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Trapezoidal Channel Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—TRAPEZOIDAL CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—TRAPEZOIDAL CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Gutter Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Irregular Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—IRREGULAR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—IRREGULAR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Parabolic Channel Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—PARABOLIC CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—PARABOLIC CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Pressure Pipe Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Circular Pipe Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—CIRCULAR PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—CIRCULAR PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Box Pipe Worksheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—BOX PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—BOX PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Elliptical Pipe Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
UNIFORM FLOW TAB—ELLIPTICAL PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW TAB—ELLIPTICAL PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Weir Worksheet Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Rectangular Weir Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
V-Notch Weir Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Cipoletti Weir Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Broad Crested Weir Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Generic Weir Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Orifice Worksheet Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Rectangular Orifice Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Circular Orifice Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71

Contents-ii Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Generic Orifice Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
Grate Inlet in Sag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
GUTTER TAB—GRATE INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
GRATE TAB—GRATE INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
OUTPUT—GRATE INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
Grate Inlet on Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
GUTTER TAB—GRATE INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
GRATE TAB—GRATE INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
OUTPUT—GRATE INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Curb Inlet in Sag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
GUTTER TAB—CURB INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
CURB TAB—CURB INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
OUTPUT—CURB INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Curb Inlet on Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
GUTTER TAB—CURB INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
CURB TAB—CURB INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
OUTPUT—CURB INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
Ditch Inlet in Sag Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
DITCH TAB—DITCH INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82
GRATE TAB—DITCH INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82
OUTPUT—DITCH INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Ditch Inlet on Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
DITCH TAB—DITCH INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
GRATE TAB—DITCH INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
OUTPUT—DITCH INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
GUTTER TAB—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
SLOT TAB—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
OUTPUT—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
GUTTER TAB—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
SLOT TAB—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
OUTPUT—SLOTTED DRAIN INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
Combination Inlet in Sag Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
GUTTER TAB—COMBINATION INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
INLET TAB—COMBINATION INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-91
GRATE TAB—COMBINATION INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-91
CURB TAB—COMBINATION INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92
OUTPUT—COMBINATION INLET IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92
Combination Inlet on Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
GUTTER TAB—COMBINATION INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
INLET TAB—COMBINATION INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
GRATE TAB—COMBINATION INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
CURB TAB—COMBINATION INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
OUTPUT—COMBINATION INLET ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
Combination Inlet Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
Rating Table Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Contents-iii

 Rating Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Rating Curve Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Rating Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Cross Section Report Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Cross Section Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Irregular Section Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Weighted Roughness Method Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Options Dialog Box - FlexUnits Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Project Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
GVF Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
GVF Profile Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Tabular Report Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Tabular Report Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Custom Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Filter Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Print Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
Set Field Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Considerations for ProjectWise Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise with FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Performing ProjectWise Operations from within FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114

Chapter 4: How Do I… 117

Create A New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Creating a New Project From the Welcome Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Creating a New Project from the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Open an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Create a New Worksheet?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Name a Worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Edit a Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Create a Rating Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Plot Rating Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Plot a Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Print a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Customize a Tabular Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Contents-iv Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Sort the Contents of a Column in a Tabular Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Filter the Contents of a Tabular Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
Set Field Options (Unit, Precision, Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127
Save a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127
Exit Bentley FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127

Chapter 5: Bentley FlowMaster Theory 129

Uniform Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Manning’s Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
Kutter’s Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
Hazen-Williams Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Darcy-Weisbach Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Critical Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Basic Concepts of Critical Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Hydraulic and Energy Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
THE ENERGY PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
THE ENERGY EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137
HYDRAULIC GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138
ENERGY GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138
HGL CONVERGENCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138
Friction Loss Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
CHÉZY’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
KUTTER ’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140
MANNING’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140
DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-141
SWAMEE AND JAIN EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144
PRESSURE FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
UNIFORM FLOW AND NORMAL DEPTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
CRITICAL FLOW, CRITICAL DEPTH, AND CRITICAL SLOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
Subcritical Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Supercritical Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-146
Slope Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-146
Hydraulically Steep Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Critical Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Hydraulically Mild Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Zone Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Profile Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-147
Energy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-150
STANDARD STEP METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
DIRECT STEP METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
Mixed Flow Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
SEALING (SURCHARGING) CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Contents-v

 RAPIDLY VARIED FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Backwater Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Frontwater Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Weir Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Sharp-Crested Weirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
RECTANGULAR SHARP-CRESTED WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
V-NOTCH SHARP-CRESTED WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
CIPOLLETTI SHARP-CRESTED WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
SUBMERGED SHARP-CRESTED WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Non-Sharp-Crested Weirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
BROAD-CRESTED WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
TRIANGULAR AND TRAPEZOIDAL WEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Orifice Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Orifice Coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
SLUICE GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Pressure Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Hydraulic Grade and Energy Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
Inlet Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
HEC-22 Inlet Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
Flows in Gutters on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
UNIFORM GUTTER CROSS SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
COMPOSITE GUTTER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Inlet Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
INLETS ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Grate Inlet on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
Curb Inlet on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173
Slot Inlet on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Combination Inlet on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
INLETS IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Grate Inlet in Sag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Curb Inlet in Sag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
WEIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-178
ORIFICE FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
TRANSITION FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180
Slot Inlet in Sag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180
WEIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180
ORIFICE FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
TRANSITIONAL FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
Combination Inlet in Sag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
EQUAL LENGTH INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
SWEEPER INLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-182

Chapter 6: Pavement Drainage 183

Design Frequency and Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184
Selection of Design Frequency and Design Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184

Contents-vi Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Selection of Check Storm and Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-186
Surface Drainage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-187
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-187
Longitudinal Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-188
Cross (Transverse) Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-189
Curb and Gutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-190
Roadside and Median Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-191
Bridge Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-192
Median Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-192
Impact Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-193
Flow in Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-193
Capacity Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-193
Conventional Curb and Gutter Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-195
CONVENTIONAL GUTTERS OF UNIFORM CROSS SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-195
COMPOSITE GUTTER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-196
CONVENTIONAL GUTTERS WITH CURVED SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-201
Shallow Swale Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-201
V-SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-201
CIRCULAR SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-204
Flow in Sag Vertical Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-206
Relative Flow Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-207
Gutter Flow Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-209
Drainage Inlet Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-210
Inlet Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211
Characteristics and Uses of Inlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211
Inlet Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-212
FACTORS AFFECTING INTERCEPTION CAPACITY ON CONTINUOUS GRADES .6-219
FACTORS AFFECTING INLET INTERCEPTION CAPACITY IN SAG LOCATIONS . .6-221
COMPARISON OF INTERCEPTION CAPACITY OF INLETS ON GRADE . . . . . . . .6-221
Interception Capacity of Inlets on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-225
GRATE INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-225
CURB-OPENING INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-231
SLOTTED INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-236
Combination Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-237
Interception Capacity of Inlets in Sag Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-241
GRATE INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-242
CURB-OPENING INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-244
COMBINATION INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-251
Inlet Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-253
GEOMETRIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-254
INLET SPACING ON CONTINUOUS GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-254
FLANKING INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-264
Median, Embankment, and Bridge Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-267
MEDIAN AND ROADSIDE DITCH INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-267
EMBANKMENT INLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-273
Grate Type Selection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-274

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Contents-vii

Chapter 7: HEC 22 Charts 277

Chapter 8: Engineer’s Reference 307

Energy Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-307
Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-308
Roughness Values—Kutter’s Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-310
Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach (Colebrook-White) Equation . . . . . 8-312
Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-313

Appendix 9: About Bentley Systems 315

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-315
SewerGEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-316
CivilStorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-316
WaterGEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-317
WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-318
SewerCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-318
StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-318
PondPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-319
CulvertMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-319
Bentley Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-319
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-320
Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-320
Instant Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-320

Index 321

Contents-viii Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Contents-ix
Contents-x Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 Chapter

Orientation 1
Thank you for purchasing Bentley FlowMaster. At Bentley Systems, we pride
ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to
make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it antic-
ipates your needs without getting in your way.

Bentley FlowMaster is a feature-rich program with extensive online documentation,

which provides a level of instruction appropriate to your needs.

When you first use Bentley FlowMaster, the intuitive interface and interactive dialog
boxes will guide you. If you need more information, use the online help by either
pressing the Help button present in each dialog box, pressing the F1 key, or right-
clicking anywhere in a dialog box.

1.1 Using the Bentley FlowMaster

Documentation
Note: If you cannot find the information you need, make sure you use
the index or search the online book (.PDF) or online help (.CHM).

These online resources contain extra information that is useful

when you are actually using the software and need context-
sensitive assistance or help with the software interface.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 1-1

Using the Bentley FlowMaster Documentation

We designed the Bentley FlowMaster documentation to provide you content in the

best possible way. With this in mind, there is significantly more content available
online than in-print. The online content was designed to provide what you need while
you are using the software, and so the online content includes information about the
Bentley FlowMaster interface. The online content can also be updated dynamically as
we update the software, and delivered to you by download or as part of an updated
software version.

Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration

At the conclusion of the installation process, the Municipal License Administrator will
be executed, to automatically detect and set the default configuration for your product,
if possible. However, if multiple license configurations are detected on the license
server, you will need to select which one to use by default, each time the product
starts. If this is the case, you will see the screen below. Simply press OK to clear the
Warning dialog, then press Refresh Configurations to display the list of available
configurations. Select one and press Make Default, then exit the License Adminis-
trator. (You only need to repeat this step if you decide to make a different configura-
tion the default in the future.

Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT

Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads, around-the-clock
technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting
services, as well as technical information and support channels. It’s easy to stay up-to-
date with the latest advances in our software. Software updates can be downloaded
from our Web site, and your version of Bentley FlowMaster can then be upgraded to
the current version quickly and easily. Just click Check for Updates on the toolbar to
launch your preferred Web browser and open our Web site. The Web site automati-
cally checks to see if your installed version is the latest available, and if not, it
provides you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it up-to-
date. You can also access our KnowledgeBase for answers to your Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQs).

Note: Your PC must be connected to the Internet to use the Check for
Updates button.

Troubleshooting

Due to the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications running
in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to deter-
mine the configuration of your current system.

1-2 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Orientation

Try these steps before contacting our technical support staff

1. Shut down and restart your computer.

2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Exit any applications that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.

Caution: After you install Bentley FlowMaster, make certain that you
restart any antivirus software you have disabled. Failure to
restart your antivirus software leaves you exposed to
potentially destructive computer viruses.

4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).

If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact Technical
Support.

Checking Your Current Registration Status

After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status
by opening the About... box from within the software itself.

To view your registration information

1. Select Help > About Bentley FlowMaster.

2. The version and build number for Bentley FlowMaster display in the lower-left
corner of the About Bentley FlowMaster dialog box.
The current registration status is also displayed, including: user name and company,
serial number, license type and check-in status, feature level, expiration date, and
SELECT Server information.

1.1 How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions

“How Do I?” is an easily referenced topic in Bentley FlowMaster’s online help. It is a
listing of commonly asked questions about Bentley FlowMaster.

To use How Do I?, click Help > How Do I? The listing of How Do I? topics appear.
Click the topic of your choice for a detailed explanation.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 1-3

Glossary

1.2 Glossary
The glossary contains many terms used throughout the application and the online help.
To use the Glossary:

• Click Help > Contents to open the main Help window.

• Click the Contents tab, scroll to the bottom of the bookmarks list, and click the
Glossary bookmark.

1.3 Contacting Bentley Systems about Haestad

Methods Products
Contact Bentley Systems if you want information about Haestad Methods products, to
upgrade your Haestad Methods product, or need support.

• “Sales” on page 1-4

• “Technical Support” on page 1-5
• “Addresses” on page 1-6
• “Your Suggestions Count” on page 1-6

1.3.1 Sales

Bentley Systems’ professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact
your sales representative with any questions regarding Haestad Methods products and
prices.

Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Email: sales@[Link]

RELATED TOPICS

• See “Technical Support” on page 5.

• See “Addresses” on page 6.

1-4 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Orientation

1.3.2 Technical Support

We hope that everything runs smoothly, and you never have a need for our technical
support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their
services seven days a week and may be contacted by phone, fax, and the Internet. For
information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team and
request information about our Bentley SELECT program.

When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your
problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information
available:

• Operating system your computer is running.

• Name and build number of the Bentley Systems software you are calling about.
The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About Bentley Flow-
Master. The build number is the number in brackets located in the lower-left
corner of the dialog box that opens.
• A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
• Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.

When emailing or faxing for support, please provide additional details as follows so
we can provide a timely and accurate response:

• Company name, address, and phone number

• A detailed explanation of your concerns
• The [Link] file located in the following directory: C:\Documents and
Settings\<User Name>\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\FlowMaster\8.

RELATED TOPICS

• See “Sales” on page 4.

• See “Addresses” on page 6.
• See “Support Hours” on page 5.

Support Hours
Support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. You can contact our technical
support team at:

Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Email: support@[Link]

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 1-5

Contacting Bentley Systems about Haestad Methods Products

1.3.3 Addresses

Use this address information to contact us:

Internet: [Link]
Email: sales@[Link]
support@[Link]
Phone: +1-203-755-1666
Fax: +1-203-597-1488
Mail: Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Haestad Methods Solution Center
Suite 200W
27 Siemon Company Drive
Watertown, CT 06795

1.3.4 Your Suggestions Count

At Bentley Systems, we strive to continually provide you with sophisticated software

and documentation. We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving
our products, our online help system, and our printed manuals. Your feedback will
guide us in developing products that will make you more productive. Please let us hear
from you!

1-6 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

Tutorials 2
Bentley FlowMaster is an easy-to-use, Windows-based program that aids civil engi-
neers with the design and analysis of pipes, ditches, open channels, weirs, and more.

Bentley FlowMaster computes flows, water velocities, depths and pressures based on
several well-known formulas: Darcy-Weisbach, Manning’s, Kutter’s, and Hazen-Will-
iams. It also utilizes the HEC-22 methodology to perform pavement drainage and inlet
flow calculations.

Bentley FlowMaster lets you solve for a variable you select, computing the solution
from the parameters you provide. The program will also calculate rating tables, and
will plot curves and cross sections. These graphs and reports can then be viewed on
the screen, copied to the Windows clipboard, saved to a file, or printed on any stan-
dard printer.

These tutorials provide step-by-step instructions for creating a project, entering data in
a worksheet, and generating reports.

2.1 Overview
The purpose of this section is to provide step-by-step tutorials to get you familiar with
some of the features and capabilities of Bentley FlowMaster. The tutorials serve as a
means to get you started exploring and using the software.

Note: You should follow these tutorials in sequence.

If you need help within the program, press F1 to access the context-sensitive online
help.

2.2 Tutorial 1—Creating a New Project

Data is entered and calculated in a worksheet. There are different worksheets for
various structure types, because of the differing input and output data that is required
for each.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-7

Tutorial 1—Creating a New Project

Worksheets are contained within an Bentley FlowMaster project. A project holds

global information such as Project Engineer, Project Date, Project Location (the loca-
tion where the project files are stored on your computer), and any Notes that go along
with the project.

The project is also associated with a unit system (FlexUnits). The unit system defines
the units and display precision used in the project. Upon project creation, the default
unit system is used, but this can be modified and saved for use on future projects.

1. Start Bentley FlowMaster by double-clicking the shortcut on your desktop or by

clicking the Bentley FlowMaster command from the Start menu.
2. When Bentley FlowMaster opens, the welcome dialog box appears. Click the
Create New Project button.

3. The main window opens, with the new project loaded.

2-8 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

4. Click File > Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
5. Choose the directory to which the file will be saved and type MyTutorial1 as the
name for the project file.

Note: We recommend you name the tutorial files you are using
differently than any other files in your program directory, so you
don’t overwrite pre-existing files.

6. Now, enter some global project information. Click File > Properties.
7. In the Project Properties dialog box, note the types of information.
The Project Date field should already contain today’s date (this information is
retrieved from the Windows system calendar and clock—click the down-arrow
button to select a different date by using a calendar). Project File Name contains
the path to the directory where the project is saved.
8. Enter the following information in the Project Properties dialog box:
– Enter your name in the Project Engineer field.
– Enter Tutorial Project in the Project Notes field.
– If you want your company name to appear on the bottom of all reports associ-
ated with the project, enter the company name in the Project Company field.
– If you want your company’s logo to appear on the bottom of all reports associ-
ated with the project, click in the Company Logo field, then click the Ellipses
button and select your company’s logo image file.
– Click OK.

9. Click File > New > Worksheet.

10. In the Create New Worksheet dialog box, ensure that Open Channels is high-
lighted in the Categories pane, then click Trapezoidal Channel.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-9

Tutorial 1—Creating a New Project

11. Click OK.

12. In the Trapezoidal Channel Worksheet dialog box, select Discharge in the Solve
For drop-down list.
13. Select Manning Formula in the Friction Method drop-down list.

14. In the Roughness Coefficient field, click the Ellipsis (...) button to open the
Materials library.
a. Expand the tree containing all of the available material libraries.
b. Expand the HMI Material Library item to see the available materials within
the library.
c. Click Flood plain, cultivated to highlight it.

2-10 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

Note that the lower section of the Materials dialog box is updated with the
data that is associated with this material.
d. Click OK; the Materials dialog box closes and a roughness coefficient of
0.035 displays in the Roughness Coefficient field.

15. Click each of the other input fields in turn and enter the data contained in the
following table into the appropriate input fields:
Table 2-1: Input Data for Trapezoidal Worksheet (Tutorial 1)

Attribute: Value:

Channel Slope 0.004500 ft/ft

Normal Depth 2.30 ft

Left Side Slope 0.50 H:V

Right Side Slope 0.75 H:V

Bottom Width 5.00 ft

The calculated discharge should be 53.21 ft3/sec.

Note: After you enter the last data into a field (Bottom Width, for
example), you have to click in another field or click the Solve
button to get the Discharge to refresh and update.

16. Save the project by clicking File > Save As.

17. Enter MyTutorial2 in the File name field, then click Save.
18. If needed, close any open dialog boxes.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-11

Tutorial 2—Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

2.3 Tutorial 2—Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

For free-surface flow, depth rarely remains the same throughout the length of a
channel or pipe. Gradually varied flow analysis lets you calculate the downstream
depth from the length of the channel and the upstream depth, or to calculate the
upstream depth from the length of the channel and the downstream depth.

This tutorial is based on the project that was created in “Tutorial 1—Creating a New
Project” on page 2-7.

1. If necessary, open the MyTutorial2 project file that you saved at the end of
Tutorial1, and, in the Project Explorer, double-click the Trapezoidal Channel
item to open the worksheet containing the channel you defined in Tutorial 1.
2. In the Trapezoidal Channel Worksheet dialog box, click the Gradually Varied
Flow tab.

2-12 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

a. If needed, click the Direction drop-down list and select Given Downstream.
This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for upstream
depth (when Given Downstream is selected) or downstream depth (when
Given Upstream is selected).
b. Click each of the other input fields in turn and enter the data contained in the
following table into the appropriate input fields:
Table 2-2: Input Data for Gradually Varied Flow Analysis (Tutorial 2)

Attribute Value

Downstream Depth 3.0 ft

Length 100 ft

Number of Steps 5

c. Click Solve. The calculated downstream depth should be 2.74 ft.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-13

Tutorial 2—Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

3. View the profile of the gradually varied flow analysis: Click Analysis > GVF
Profile.

4. Save the project by clicking File > Save As.

5. Enter MyTutorial3 in the File name field, and click Save.
6. If needed, close any open dialog boxes.

2-14 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

2.4 Tutorial 3—Results Reporting

Bentley FlowMaster provides a number of methods of generating reports from your
calculated results. This tutorial introduces you to these methods.

This tutorial is based on the project that was used in “Tutorial 2—Gradually Varied
Flow Analysis” on page 2-12.

1. If necessary, open the MyTutorial3 project file that you saved at the end of Tuto-
rial 2, and, in the Project Explorer, double-click the Trapezoidal Channel item to
open the worksheet containing the channel you defined in Tutorial 2.
2. Click Analysis > Detailed Report.
3. In the Generic Report Setup dialog box, change the default report title then click
OK, or click OK to accept the default report title “Worksheet for Trapezoidal
Channel.”
4. The Print Preview dialog box opens, displaying the report as it would appear if
printed.
Note the information supplied in the report: Project Information, Input Data,
Results, GVF Input Data, and GVF Output Data.
5. Close the Print Preview dialog box.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-15

Tutorial 3—Results Reporting

6. Click Analysis > Tabular Reports > Channels > Trapezoidal.

7. The Report Table dialog box that opens presents all calculation messages, notes,
input data, and results for all of the trapezoidal channel worksheets within the
project; in this case, just one.

2-16 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

This report is useful for comparing multiple worksheets of the same type. If you
want to print this report, begin by clicking the Print Preview button.
8. Close the Report Table dialog box.
9. Click Analysis > Cross Section.

Note: If Analysis > Cross Section is dimmed, click the Solve button,
then try the menu item again.

10. In the Cross Section Setup dialog box, enter Trapezoidal Channel as the Report
Title, and click OK.

11. The Cross Section dialog box displays a cross section diagram defined by the trap-
ezoidal channel worksheet.
You can print the cross section by using the Print Preview button, then clicking
the Print button in the Print Preview window.

12. To change the size of the diagram:

a. Click the Options button.
b. Select the Manual Scale check box.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-17

Tutorial 3—Results Reporting

c. Enter new value in the Aspect Ratio field, such as 3, and click OK. The
diagram changes to reflect the aspect ration you entered.
d. Change the Aspect Ratio back to 1.
e. Close the Cross Section dialog box.

13. Bentley FlowMaster also lets you graph a range of results that are calculated from
a range of values for a specified variable via the rating curves feature.
a. If necessary, close any open Print and Print Preview dialog boxes and open
the Trapezoidal Channel Worksheet dialog box.
b. Click Analysis > Rating Curve.
c. In the Rating Curve Setup dialog box, select Velocity in the Plot drop-down
list. This is the attribute for which a range of values will be calculated.
d. Select Channel Slope in the Vs. drop-down list; this sets the attribute against
which the Plot attribute is calculated.
e. Enter the information contained in the following table for the other fields in
the Rating Curve Setup dialog box:
- Minimum: 0.0030 ft/ft
- Maximum: 0.0060 ft/ft
- Increment: 0.0005 ft/ft

f. Click OK. The Rating Curve dialog box opens, showing a graph of the
velocity at each of the slopes in the range that is specified by the values you
entered.

2-18 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

14. You can change practically any aspect of the graph’s appearance by clicking the
Chart Options button.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-19

Tutorial 3—Results Reporting

a. Experiment with the various settings available to you. To create the 3D chart
shown here:

a. Click Chart Options > 3D.

b. Select the 3 Dimensions check box.
c. Set the 3D % to 90.
d. Click the Walls tab.
e. Click the Bottom tab, then click Color.

2-20 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Tutorials

f. Set the bottom color (in the example it has an Red, Green, Blue (RGB) value
of 0, 255, 255).
g. Click the Panel, then Background tabs.
h. Click the Pattern, Gradient, then Format tabs.
i. Select Vertical from the Direction drop-down list.
j. Click the Colors tab.
k. Click Start.
l. Click Custom and set an RGB value of 255, 215, 0.
m. Click OK > OK to close the color dialog boxes.
n. Click End.
o. Select white from the Color Editor dialog box (RGB of 255, 255, 255).
p. Click OK.
q. In the Hatch Brush Editor dialog box, select the No Middle Color check box.
r. Click OK, then Close.

15. You can print the chart by clicking the Print Preview button, then clicking the
Print button in the Print Preview window, or redefine the rating curve settings by
clicking the Define Rating Curve button.
16. Save the project, then close all the open windows.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 2-21

Tutorial 3—Results Reporting

2-22 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

Bentley FlowMaster 3
Environment

The Bentley FlowMaster interface utilizes dockable windows and toolbars, so the
position of the various interface elements can be manually adjusted to suit your prefer-
ence. By default, the Bentley FlowMaster environment looks like this:

The components that make up the Bentley FlowMaster interface are as follows:

• “Main Window”
• “Project Explorer”
• “Engineering Library Explorer”
• “Menus”
• “Toolbars”

Any changes you make to the placement and display of the dockable windows and
toolbars will be saved, and will persist every time Bentley FlowMaster is started

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-23

Welcome Dialog Box

3.1 Welcome Dialog Box

The Welcome dialog box appears upon startup of the application. The following
controls are available:

Create New Project: This button lets you create a new Bentley
FlowMaster project. When you click Create New
Project, a new untitled project is created. The first
time the project is saved, you can specify a name for
the project.
Create Worksheet: This button opens the Create New Worksheet dialog
box, letting you quickly create a worksheet that is not
associated with a particular project.
Open Existing Project: This button lets you open a previously created
project.
Show This Dialog at Start: This check box lets you display the Welcome dialog
box when ever your start Bentley FlowMaster. Show
This Dialog at Start is selected by default.
Deselecting this check box causes Bentley
FlowMaster to start up at the main window without
opening the Welcome dialog box.

3.2 Main Window

The Bentley FlowMaster main window is the workspace in which various project
worksheets are displayed. The main window itself does not contain any controls.

You can manually position the project worksheets anywhere in the workspace, or use
the Window menu controls to automatically position them in a number of ways.

3.3 Project Explorer

The Project Explorer window displays project components in a hierarchical tree view.

Data is entered and calculated in a worksheet. There are different worksheets for
various structure types, because of the differing input and output data that is required
for each.

Worksheets are contained within an Bentley FlowMaster project. A project holds

global information such as Project Engineer, Project Date, Project Location (the loca-
tion where the project files are stored on your computer), and any Notes that go along
with the project.

3-24 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

You can also create folders within a project. These folders can be used to organize
your worksheets within the project. The folders are contained solely within the
project—new Windows directories will not be created when you create folders in the
Project Explorer.

The project is also associated with a unit system (FlexUnits). The unit system defines
the measurement and display precision used in the project. Upon project creation, the
default unit system is used, but you can modify unit system and save it for use on
future projects.

Each worksheet in the project is represented by an icon that indicates the worksheet
element type and an automatically generated label.

Various commands are made accessible in the Project Explorer through the use of
shortcut menus.

Right-clicking a Project icon in the tree view will open a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:

• Add—Hovering the mouse over this command opens a submenu containing the
following commands:
– New Worksheet—This command opens the Create New Worksheet dialog
box, letting you create a new worksheet.
– New Folder—This command creates a new folder under the current project,
letting you organize your project elements.

• Properties—This command opens the Project Properties dialog box, letting you
view and modify basic project information such as date, engineer, location, and
notes.
• Save—This command saves the current project.
• Save As—This command saves all currently open projects.
• Close Project—Closes the currently open project.

Right-clicking a worksheet within a project in the Project Explorer will open a

shortcut menu containing the following commands:

• Rename—This command lets you rename the currently highlighted worksheet.

• Delete—This command deletes the currently highlighted worksheet from the
library.
• Duplicate—This command creates a copy of the currently highlighted worksheet
in the same project.
• Print—This command prints a report of the currently highlighted worksheet.
When you click this command, you are prompted to enter the title for the report.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-25

Engineering Library Explorer

• Print Selected Worksheets—This command lets you print more than one work-
sheet at a time and is only available when multiple worksheeets are selected in the
Project Explorer. To use this command, first select the first worksheet to print,
then Ctrl+click or Shift+click the additional worksheets you want to print. Right-
click and select Print Selected Worksheets.

3.3.1 Project Files

Bentley FlowMaster projects comprise the following files:

Note: When transferring an Bentley FlowMaster project, make sure

that these files are present, or you will not be able to open it.

Projectname.fm8: This file holds all of the project settings.

[Link]: This is a database file that holds all of the input and
output data for the project. When emailing or
otherwise transferring .mdb files, it is a good idea to
compress them using WinZip or another compression
utility—the file size will generally be reduced
drastically.
Other files that you may encounter in your saved file directories include:

[Link]: This file is a backup file for the FlowMaster project

settings file.
[Link]: This file is a backup file for the FlowMaster data
database file.
[Link]: This file is a database lock file. It will be
automatically generated when a project database is
currently open, and it prevents changes from being
made directly to the database. This prevents data loss
and corruption.

3.4 Engineering Library Explorer

The Engineering Library Explorer contains all of the project’s material libraries. Indi-
vidual material libraries are compilations of all available materials, and their
attributes. Click View > Engineering Library to see the library.

You cannot modify the default material library that is installed with Bentley Flow-
Master. However, you can create a new library that contains any materials that you
define.

3-26 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Each library is represented by an icon in the explorer view, and each material under
the library is represented by another icon.

Right-click a Project icon in the Project Explorer to open a shortcut menu containing
the following commands:

• Add—Hover the mouse over this command to open a submenu containing the
following commands:
– Material—This command creates a new material entry in the current library.
– Folder—This command creates a new folder under the current library, letting
you organize your materials within the library.

• Delete—This command deletes the current library from the current project.
• Rename—This command lets you rename the current library.

Right-click a material icon in the tree view to open a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:

• Add—This command creates a new material within the current library.

• Delete—This command deletes the currently highlighted material from the
library.
• Rename—This command lets you rename the currently highlighted material.
• Properties—This command lets you modify the attribute values for the currently
highlighted material.

3.5 Menus
FlowMaster’s drop-down menu system provides access to all PondPack's tools and
data managers. The menu system consists of the following selections:

• “File Menu”
• “Edit Menu”
• “Analysis Menu”
• “View Menu”
• “Tools Menu”
• “Window Menu”
• “Help Menu”

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-27

Menus

3.5.1 File Menu

The File menu contains project management commands. It provides features to create,
read, write, and print project files.

• New—This command opens a submenu containing the following options:

– Project—This command creates a new Bentley FlowMaster project. Initi-
ating this command opens a dialog box that lets you enter a drive, directory,
and filename for your new project file.
– Worksheet—This command opens the Create New Worksheet dialog box,
letting you create a new worksheet within the current project.
• Open—This command opens an existing Bentley FlowMaster project. Initiating
this command opens a dialog box that lets you choose the project file that you
want to open.
• Close—This command closes the project that is currently highlighted in the
Project Explorer, without closing Bentley FlowMaster.
• Close All—This command closes all open projects without closing FlowMaster.
• Save—This command saves the current project.
• Save As—This command lets you save the current project under a different file-
name and/or to a different directory.
• Save All—This command saves all currently open projects.
• ProjectWise—This command opens a submenu containing the following
commands:
– Open—Open an existing FlowMaster project from ProjectWise. You are
prompted to log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not already logged
in.
– Save As—Saves the current project to a ProjectWise datasource. You are
prompted to log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not already logged
in.
– Change Datasource—Lets you connect to a different ProjectWise datasource
for future Open and Save As operations.
• Print Setup—This command lets you define the print settings that will be used
when the current view of the project is printed.
• Print Preview—This command displays what a printout of the project would
look like. When you click this button, you are prompted to enter the title for the
report.
• Print—This command prints the current view of the project.

3-28 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Properties—This command opens the Project Properties dialog box, letting you
view and edit the project date, engineer, file name, and any notes associated with
the project.
• Recent Projects—This command displays a list of all recently opened projects.
• Exit—This command closes Bentley FlowMaster. If you have any open projects
that need saving, you are prompted to save them.

3.5.2 Edit Menu

The Edit menu lets you use time-saving shortcuts such as undo/redo and cut-copy-
paste.

• Undo—This command cancels last data input action on the current worksheet.
Clicking Undo again cancels the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
• Redo—This command cancels the last Undo command.
• Cut—This command removes the currently highlighted field data and places it on
the Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste the data into another
field.
• Copy—This command copies the currently highlighted field data and places it on
the Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste the data into another
field
• Paste—This command pastes the data stored in the Windows clipboard into the
currently highlighted field.
• Copy Worksheet Data—This command copies the input data from the currently
active worksheet.
• Duplicate Worksheet—This command creates a copy of the current worksheet,
including all input data.
• Delete—This command deletes the current selection.

3.5.3 Analysis Menu

The Analysis menu provides access to various analytical tools that allow you to
generate reports, rating tables and curves, and gradually varied flow profiles.

• Detailed Report—This command opens a report that contains project informa-

tion, input data, and calculated results.
• Rating Table—This command opens the Rating Table Setup dialog box, where
you define a rating table to be associated with the current worksheet.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-29

Menus

• Rating Curve—This command opens the Rating Curve Setup dialog box, letting
you define the parameters that will define the content and appearance of the rating
curve plot.
• Cross Section—This command opens the Cross Section Setup dialog box, letting
you enter a title for the cross section and to change the scale, if desired.
• GVF Profile—This command opens a dialog box displaying a diagram of the
worksheet element’s cross section. More information about the various profile
types can be found in “Profile Classification” on page 5-147.
• GVF Profile Table—This command opens a report displaying the results of the
gradually varied flow calculations in tabular format.
• Tabular Reports—This command opens a submenu that lets you select tabular
reports displaying input and results for the chosen worksheet.

3.5.4 View Menu

The View menu lets you activate/deactivate the component windows of the Bentley
FlowMaster interface.

• Project Explorer—This command toggles on/off the display of the Project

Explorer window.
• Engineering Library Explorer—This command toggles on/off the display of the
Engineering Library Explorer window.
• Status Bar—This command toggles on/off the display of the status bar. A check
mark appears next to this command when the status bar is displayed.
• Toolbars—This command opens a submenu containing the following options:
– Standard—This command toggles on/off the display of the standard toolbar.
A check mark appears next to this command when the standard toolbar is
displayed.
– Edit—This command toggles on/off the display of the edit toolbar. A check
mark appears next to this command when the edit toolbar is displayed.
– Help—This command toggles on/off the display of the help toolbar. A check
mark appears next to this command when the help toolbar is displayed.
– Analysis—This command toggles on/off the display of the analysis toolbar. A
check mark appears next to this command when the analysis toolbar is
displayed
– Worksheets—This command toggles on/off the display of the worksheets
buttons. A check mark appears next to this command when the worksheets
toolbar is displayed.

3-30 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Reset Workspace—Resets the FlowMaster workspace so that the Project

Explorer and Engineering Library Explorer appear in their default factory-set
positions.

3.5.5 Tools Menu

The Tools menu contains a command that let you modify some project-level settings.

• Options—This command opens the Options dialog box, letting you view and edit
unit settings associated with the project, and edit ProjectWise settings.

3.5.6 Window Menu

The Window menu provides commands that allow you to alter the position of the
various worksheets within the Bentley FlowMaster window.

• Cascade—This command causes the worksheets in the main window to overlap

one another in an offset way that maintains visibility of each. Note that this
command maximizes all worksheets in the main window.
• Tile Horizontally—This command causes the worksheets in the main window to
overlap one another horizontally such that each is at least partially visible. Note
that this command maximizes all worksheets in the main window.
• Tile Vertically—This command causes the worksheets in the main window to
overlap one another vertically such that each is at least partially visible. Note that
this command maximizes all worksheets in the main window.
• Minimize All—This command minimizes all of the worksheets in the main
window.
• Close All—This command closes all of the worksheets in the main window.
• Window List—This command displays a list of all open windows.

3.5.7 Help Menu

The Help menu provides access to the Bentley FlowMaster documentation, mainte-
nance tools, and other resources.

• Dynamic Help—This command opens the online help to the topic associated with
the currently active window.
• Contents—This command opens the Table of Contents view in the online help.
• Index—This command opens the online help’s index of key words.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-31

Toolbars

• Search—This command lets you search the online help for a specified word or
phrase.
• Release Notes—This command opens the online help to describe the new features
in this release of Bentley FlowMaster.
• Services—This command Opens a sub-menu containing the following options:
– Contents—Opens your browser to the Services page of our Web site.
– Multimedia CD—Starts the Virtual Tour, a multimedia presentation that
includes information about Haestad Methods products and services.
– On-Line Forums—Opens your browser to the online forums page of the
[Link] Web site.
– [Link]—Opens your browser to the main page of the our Web site.
– [Link]—Opens your browser to the [Link] Web site.
• Welcome Dialog—This command opens the Welcome dialog box.
• Tutorials—This command accesses the interactive tutorials, which guide you
through many of the program’s features. Tutorials are a great way to become
familiar with new features (for more information, see “Tutorials” on page 2-7).
• Using Bentley FlowMaster—This opens the How Do I section of the online help,
providing assistance with frequently used functions.
• How Do I?—This command opens help to a series of frequently-asked questions.
• Check for Updates—Lets you update your software via the World Wide Web.
For more information, “Contacting Bentley Systems about Haestad Methods
Products” on page 1-4.
• About Bentley FlowMaster—This command opens a window containing the
product and registration information for Bentley FlowMaster.

3.6 Toolbars
Bentley FlowMaster has four toolbars:

• “Standard Toolbar”
• “Analysis Toolbar”
• “Worksheets Toolbar”
• “Edit Toolbar”
• “Help Toolbar”

3-32 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Standard
Toolbar Edit
Toolbar Help
Toolbar Analysis
Toolbar

Worksheets
Toolbar

3.6.1 Customizing Toolbars

You can add and remove buttons to any toolbar. Click the down arrow on the end of
the toolbar you want to customize, click Add or Remove Buttons, then click the
toolbar button you want to add or remove. A check mark appears next to the toolbar
buttons that are currently displayed.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-33

Toolbars

You can move the menu bar and any toolbar to any position in the FlowMaster main
window. To move the menu bar or a toolbar, move your mouse to the vertical dotted
line on the left side of any toolbar until the cursor changes to a crosshairs, then drag
the toolbar to the desired location. If you move a toolbar away from the other toolbar,
the toolbar becomes a floating dialog box.

If you move the menu bar or a toolbar to any of the four sides of the main window, the
toolbar will dock or attach to the window in that location.

3.6.2 Standard Toolbar

The standard toolbar contains the following buttons:

• New—Click this button to open a submenu containing the following options:

– Project—This command creates a new Bentley FlowMaster project. Initi-
ating this command opens a dialog box that lets you enter a drive, directory,
and filename for your new project file.
– Worksheet—This command opens the Create New Worksheet dialog box,
letting you create a new worksheet within the current project.
• Open—This button opens an existing Bentley FlowMaster project. Initiating this
command opens a dialog box that lets you choose the project file that you want to
open.
• Save—This button saves the current project.
• Save All—This button saves all currently open projects.
• Print—This button prints the current view of the project.
• Print Preview—This button displays what a printout of the project would look
like. When you click this button, you are prompted to enter the title for the report.
• Toolbar Options—Click this arrow at the end of the toolbar to add or remove
buttons.

3.6.3 Analysis Toolbar

The analysis toolbar contains the following buttons:

• Tabular Reports—This command opens a tabular report displaying input and

results for the chosen worksheet.

3-34 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Detailed Report—This command opens a report that contains project informa-

tion, input data, and calculated results.
• Rating Table—This command opens the Rating Table Setup dialog box, where
you define a rating table to be associated with the current worksheet.
• Rating Curve—This command opens the Rating Curve Setup dialog box, where
you define the parameters that will define the content and appearance of the rating
curve plot.
• Cross Section—This command opens the Cross Section Setup dialog box, where
you enter a title for the cross section and to change the scale, if desired.
• GVF Profile—This command opens a dialog box displaying a diagram of the
worksheet element’s cross section.
• GVF Profile Table—This command opens a report displaying the results of the
gradually varied flow calculations in tabular format.
• Toolbar Options—Click this arrow at the end of the toolbar to add or remove
buttons.

3.6.4 Worksheets Toolbar

The Worksheets toolbar buttons let you access worksheets for:

• Open channels
• Pipes
• Weirs
• Orifices
• Inlets

The Worksheets toolbar also contains the following control:

• Toolbar Options—Click this arrow at the end of the toolbar to add or remove
buttons.

3.6.5 Edit Toolbar

The Edit toolbar contains the following buttons:

• Cut—This button removes the currently highlighted field data and places it on the
Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste the data into another field.
• Copy—This button copies the currently highlighted field data and places it on the
Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste the data into another field

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-35

Create New Worksheet

• Paste—This button pastes the data stored in the Windows clipboard into the
currently highlighted field.
• Undo—This button cancels last data input action on the current worksheet.
Clicking Undo again cancels the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
• Redo—This button cancels the last Undo command.
• Toolbar Options—Click this arrow at the end of the toolbar to add or remove
buttons.

3.6.6 Help Toolbar

The Help toolbar provides easy access to commonly used documentation and help
resources.

• Check for Updates—This button lets you update your software via the World
Wide Web.
• Contents—This button opens the online help to the Table Of Contents view.
• Dynamic Help—This button opens the online help for the currently active
window or worksheet.
• Toolbar Options—Click this arrow at the end of the toolbar to add or remove
buttons.

3.7 Create New Worksheet

This dialog box lets you choose the type of worksheet dialog box to create. The left
pane of the window displays the five worksheet categories, and the right pane shows
the individual element types under the category. Click a category in the left pane, then
click the desired worksheet type and click OK.

The available categories are as follows:

• Open Channels—The Open Channels category includes the following worksheet

types:
– Rectangular Channel
– Triangular Channel
– Trapezoidal Channel
– Gutter Channel
– Irregular Section
– Parabolic Channel

3-36 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Pipes—The Pipes category includes the following worksheet types:

– Pressure Pipe
– Circular Pipe
– Box Pipe
– Elliptical Pipe
– Irregular Section

• Weirs—The Weirs category includes the following worksheet types:

– Rectangular Weir
– V-Notch Weir
– Cipolletti Weir
– Broad Crested Weir
– Generic Weir

• Orifices—The Orifices category includes the following worksheet types:

– Rectangular Orifice
– Circular Orifice
– Generic Orifice

• Inlets—The Inlets category includes the following worksheet types:

– Grate Inlet in Sag
– Grate Inlet on Grade
– Curb Inlet in Sag
– Curb Inlet on Grade
– Ditch Inlet in Sag
– Ditch Inlet on Grade
– Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag
– Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade
– Combination Inlet in Sag
– Combination Inlet on Grade

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-37

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

3.8 Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

The following channel worksheet dialog boxes are available:

• “Rectangular Channel Dialog Boxes”

• “Triangular Channel Dialog Box”
• “Trapezoidal Channel Dialog Box”
• “Gutter Section Dialog Box”
• “Irregular Section Dialog Box”
• “Parabolic Channel Dialog Box”

3.8.1 Rectangular Channel Dialog Boxes

The following controls make up the Rectangular Channel worksheet dialog box:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Rectangular Channel”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Rectangular Channel”

Uniform Flow Tab—Rectangular Channel

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.

3-38 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop

divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Bottom Width—Width of the bottom of the channel cross section.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross-sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Flow Type—The flow is defined as:
– Supercritical if F > 1
– Subcritical if F < 1
– Critical if F = 1
where F is the Froude Number.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-39

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Rectangular Channel

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the right. There is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

3-40 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at

the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.8.2 Triangular Channel Dialog Box

The following controls make up the Triangular Channel worksheet dialog box:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Triangular Channel”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Triangular Channel”

Uniform Flow Tab—Triangular Channel

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-41

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop

divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Left Side Slope—The slope along the left side of the channel.
• Right Side Slope—The slope along the right side of the channel.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.
• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

3-42 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Triangular Channel

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the [Link] is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-43

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the

channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.8.3 Trapezoidal Channel Dialog Box

The following controls make up the Trapezoidal Channel worksheet dialog box:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Trapezoidal Channel”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Trapezoidal Channel”

Uniform Flow Tab—Trapezoidal Channel

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Left Side Slope—Slope of the left side of the channel.
• Right Side Slope—Slope of the right side of the channel.
• Bottom Width—Width of the bottom of the channel cross section.

3-44 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.
• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-45

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Trapezoidal Channel

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the [Link] is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.

3-46 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the

channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.8.4 Gutter Section Dialog Box

The Gutter Section worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and an
output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop

divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.
• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Manning’s Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-47

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of

the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.

3.8.5 Irregular Section Dialog Box

The Irregular Section worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and
an output, or results, section on the right.

The following controls make up the worksheet:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Edit Section—Opens the Irregular Section Editor, letting you define the cross
section of the irregular section.
• Options—Opens the Weighted Roughness method dialog box, letting you define
the current roughness method, open channel weighting method, and the closed
channel weighting method.
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Irregular Section”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Irregular Section”

Uniform Flow Tab—Irregular Section

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

3-48 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length. In Irregular Sections, the vertical drop is measured
from low point to low point.
• Water Surface Elevation—Elevation of the channel's flowing surface, usually
given in mean sea level (MSL).
• Elevation Range—The minimum to maximum elevation of the Irregular Section.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Critical Elevation—Water surface elevation (elevation of the channel's flowing
surface), for critical depth (depth of water in the channel for which the specific
energy is at its minimum).
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-49

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Irregular Section

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the [Link] is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction (menu)—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving
for the Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

3-50 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at

the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.8.6 Parabolic Channel Dialog Box

The following controls make up the Parabolic Channel worksheet dialog box:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Parabolic Channel”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Parabolic Channel”

Uniform Flow Tab—Parabolic Channel

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-51

Channel Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop

divided by the channel length.
• Constructed Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Constructed Top Width—Cross sectional width of the channel at the highest
point.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Flow Type—The flow is defined as:
– Supercritical if F > 1
– Subcritical if F < 1
– Critical if F = 1

3-52 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

where F is the Froude Number.

• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Parabolic Channel

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the right. There is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.
Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-53

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at

the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.9 Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

The available pipe worksheets are as follows:

• “Pressure Pipe Dialog Box”

• “Circular Pipe Dialog Box”
• “Box Pipe Worksheet Dialog Box”
• “Elliptical Pipe Section Dialog Box”
• “Irregular Section Dialog Box”

3.9.1 Pressure Pipe Dialog Box

The Pressure Pipe worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and an
output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Pressure at 1—Measured or computed pressure at section 1 in Bernoulli's Equa-

tion.
• Pressure at 2—Measured or computed pressure at section 2 in Bernoulli's Equa-
tion.
• Elevation at 1—Measured or computed elevation at section 1 in Bernoulli's
Equation.

3-54 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Elevation at 2—Measured or computed elevation at section 2 in Bernoulli's

Equation.
• Length—Distance from section 1 to section 2 measured along the channel center-
line in Bernoulli's Equation.
• Roughness Coefficient—Average height of roughness particles in the channel.
• Diameter—The inside diameter of a circular channel.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity—(This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.
• Specific Weight—(This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used) The weight of a unit volume of a substance.

Output:

• Headloss—Loss of energy grade over a longitudinal channel distance.

• Energy Grade at 1—Energy (total energy of flow with reference to a datum.
Computed for closed channels as the sum of channel centerline height above
datum, piezometric height, and the velocity head. Computed for open channels as
the sum of channel invert height above datum, the flow depth, and velocity head)
of flow at section 1 in Bernoulli's Equation.
• Energy Grade at 2—Energy (total energy of flow with reference to a datum.
Computed for closed channels as the sum of channel centerline height above
datum, piezometric height, and the velocity head. Computed for open channels as
the sum of channel invert height above datum, the flow depth, and velocity head)
of flow at section 2 in Bernoulli's Equation.
• Hydraulic Grade at 1—Hydraulic grade of flow at section 1 in Bernoulli's Equa-
tion.
• Hydraulic Grade at 2—Hydraulic grade of flow at section 2 in Bernoulli's Equa-
tion.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Friction Slope—Slope of the energy grade line (sum of base elevation, velocity
head, and pressure head at a section).

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-55

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Friction Factor—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach (Colebrook-

White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

3.9.2 Circular Pipe Dialog Box

The following controls make up the circular pipe worksheet dialog box:

• Solve For—This drop-down list lets you select the variable that you are solving
for. The variable that is chosen will appear yellow (read-only) in the list of avail-
able input fields.
• Friction Method—This drop-down list lets you select the friction method that
will be used to calculate the worksheet. The Darcy-Weisbach method requires an
additional input variable (Kinematic Viscosity) and generates additional output
(Friction Factor and Reynolds Number).
• Messages—A Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this
tab displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you
enter any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Circular Pipe”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Circular Pipe”

Uniform Flow Tab—Circular Pipe

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Diameter—The inside diameter of the circular channel.

3-56 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Percent Full—Used in closed channels as a measure of flow depth divided by
maximum depth.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Maximum Discharge—The maximum theoretical discharge that could occur for
a closed channel using a given hydraulic computation method. For closed circular
channels, this discharge occurs at 0.938 * Diameter. Any increase in depth will
decrease the discharge, which is why the full flow discharge is less than the
maximum discharge for a circular channel.
• Discharge Full—The computed discharge when a closed channel is flowing full.
• Slope Full—The computed channel slope that would produce full flow.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-57

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Circular Pipe

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the right. There is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

3-58 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Conjugate Depth—Conjugate depths of flow are the depths upstream and down-
stream of a hydraulic jump. The upstream conjugate depth is supercrital and the
downstream conjugate depth is subcritical.
• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.9.3 Box Pipe Worksheet Dialog Box

This worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Box Pipe”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Box Pipe”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Uniform Flow Tab—Box Pipe

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Height—Height of the channel cross section.
• Bottom Width—Width of the bottom of the channel cross section.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-59

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Percent Full—Used in closed channels as a measure of flow depth divided by
maximum depth.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Discharge Full—The computed discharge when a closed channel is flowing full.
• Slope Full—The computed channel slope that would produce full flow.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.
• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

3-60 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Box Pipe

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the right. There is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:
– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an
input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.
Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-61

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the

channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3.9.4 Elliptical Pipe Section Dialog Box

The elliptical pipe worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Uniform Flow Tab—Elliptical Pipe”

• “Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Elliptical Pipe”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Uniform Flow Tab—Elliptical Pipe

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

Input:

• Roughness Coefficient—A value used to represent the resistance of a convey-

ance element to flow.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Normal Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom.
• Rise—The height of the section.
• Span—The width of the section.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.
• Kinematic Viscosity (This input is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Viscosity divided by the mass density given in
units of length (squared) over time, hence the term kinematic. Viscosity is a prop-
erty measuring the fluid resistance to shear. For example, molasses and tar have
relatively high viscosity and water and air relatively low viscosity.

Output:

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

3-62 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a

partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Percent Full—Used in closed channels as a measure of flow depth divided by
maximum depth.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs and orifices, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the
hydraulic structure.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Discharge Full—The computed discharge when a closed channel is flowing full.
• Slope Full—The computed channel slope that would produce full flow.
• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.
• Friction Factor (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weisbach
Friction methods is used)—Friction coefficient used in the Darcy-Weisbach
(Colebrook-White) Formula.
• Reynolds Number (This output is only available when one of the Darcy-Weis-
bach Friction methods is used)—Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces.

Gradually Varied Flow Tab—Elliptical Pipe

The Gradually Varied Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or
results, section on the right. There is also a Direction drop-down list:

• Direction—This drop-down list lets you choose whether you are solving for the
Upstream Depth or the Downstream Depth, as follows:

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-63

Pipe Worksheet Dialog Boxes

– Given Upstream—When you choose this option, the Upstream Depth is an

input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for down-
stream depth.
– Given Downstream—When you choose this option, the Downstream Depth
is an input variable and the gradually varied flow analysis will solve for
upstream depth.

Input:

• Downstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel

bottom at the downstream end of the channel.
• Upstream Depth—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the upstream end of the channel.
• Length—The length of the channel.
• Number of Steps—The number of segments per profile that the channel is
divided into based on its starting and goal depth. In unbounded cases, the number
of steps is used to determine the marching interval, but not as strictly as in a
bounded profile. This input is required by the direct step method that is used in
the gradually varied flow analysis. It is recommended that the value entered here
be at least five for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the calculation time.

Output:

• Profile Description—The profile classification within the channel.

Note: More information about the various profile types can be found in
“Profile Classification” on page 5-147.

• Headloss—Loss of energy due to friction and minor losses.

• End Depth/Rise—Distance from water surface to low point of channel bottom at
the end of the channel.
• Normal Depth/Rise—Average distance from water surface to low point of
channel bottom along the length of the channel.
• Downstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the downstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Upstream Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate at the upstream end of the
channel, given in units of length over time.
• Channel Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also, the vertical drop
divided by the channel length.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

3-64 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3.10 Weir Worksheet Dialog Boxes

The available weir worksheets are as follows:

• “Rectangular Weir Dialog Box”

• “V-Notch Weir Dialog Box”
• “Cipoletti Weir Dialog Box”
• “Broad Crested Weir Dialog Box”
• “Generic Weir Dialog Box”

3.10.1 Rectangular Weir Dialog Box

The Rectangular Weir worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and
an output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Crest Elevation—Elevation of the bottom of the weir opening.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Discharge Coefficient—Discharge coefficient Cd used by FHWA HDS-5 meth-
odology to account for submergence effects and reduce the discharge coefficient
that would be obtained without submergence.
• Crest Length—Length of the weir opening measured at the crest, perpendicularly
to the flow direction.
• Number of Contractions—Used when the upstream channel is larger than the
rectangular weir crest length, to account for the contraction of the flow on one or
both sides of the weir opening.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Crest—Water depth upstream of the weir measured

from the crest of the weir.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-65

Weir Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Tailwater Height Above Crest—Height of the water downstream of the weir

measured from the weir crest (a negative value indicated that the tailwater is
below the crest elevation).
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the hydraulic
structure
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.

3.10.2 V-Notch Weir Dialog Box

The V-Notch Weir worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and an
output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Crest Elevation—Elevation of the bottom of the weir opening.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• V-Notch Weir Coefficient—Coefficients for V-notched weirs vary with the angle
of the notch and with head depth. See “V-Notch Weir Coefficient of Discharge”
on page 5-155.
• Notch Angle—Angle of the V-Notch weir opening measured from one side to the
other side.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Crest—Water depth upstream of the weir measured

from the crest of the weir.
• Tailwater Height Above Crest—Height of the water downstream of the weir
measured from the weir crest (a negative value indicated that the tailwater is
below the crest elevation).

3-66 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the hydraulic
structure
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.

3.10.3 Cipoletti Weir Dialog Box

The Cipoletti Weir worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and an
output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Crest Elevation—Elevation of the bottom of the weir opening.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Discharge Coefficient—Weir coefficient obtained from experimental data,
dependent on the shape of the weir.
• Crest Length—Length of the weir opening measured at the crest, perpendicularly
to the flow direction.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Crest—Water depth upstream of the weir measured

from the crest of the weir.
• Tailwater Height Above Crest—Height of the water downstream of the weir
measured from the weir crest (a negative value indicated that the tailwater is
below the crest elevation).
• Equal Side Slopes—Slope of trapezoidal channel, assumed to be identical on
both sides.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-67

Weir Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the hydraulic
structure
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.

3.10.4 Broad Crested Weir Dialog Box

The Broad Crested Weir worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left
and an output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Crest Elevation—Elevation of the bottom of the weir opening.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Crest Surface Type—Surface of a broad crested weir, defined as Paved or
Gravel. Used by FHWA HDS-5 methodology for calculating the discharge coeffi-
cient and submergence factor.
• Crest Breadth—Width (Lr) of the weir, measured in the direction of flow.
• Crest Length—Length of the weir opening measured at the crest, perpendicularly
to the flow direction.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Crest—Water depth upstream of the weir measured

from the crest of the weir.
• Tailwater Height Above Crest—Height of the water downstream of the weir
measured from the weir crest (a negative value indicated that the tailwater is
below the crest elevation).
• Discharge Coefficient—Weir coefficient obtained from experimental data,
dependent on the shape of the weir.

3-68 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Submergence Factor—Ratio (kt) used by FHWA HDS-5 methodology for calcu-

lating the submergence effect and reduce the discharge coefficient.
• Adjusted Discharge Coefficient—Discharge coefficient (Cd) used by FHWA
HDS-5 methodology to account for submergence effects and reduce the discharge
coefficient that would be obtained without submergence.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the hydraulic
structure
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.

3.10.5 Generic Weir Dialog Box

The Generic Weir worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and an
output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Crest Elevation—Elevation of the bottom of the weir opening.
• Discharge Coefficient Weir—Coefficient C used in the general weir equation.
• Crest Length—Length of the weir opening measured at the crest, perpendicularly
to the flow direction.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Crest—Water depth upstream of the weir measured

from the crest of the weir.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time. For
weirs, the velocity field is for the velocity of the water through the hydraulic
structure

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-69

Orifice Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a

partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.

3.11 Orifice Worksheet Dialog Boxes

The available orifice worksheets are as follows:

• “Rectangular Orifice Dialog Box”

• “Circular Orifice Dialog Box”
• “Generic Orifice Dialog Box”

3.11.1 Rectangular Orifice Dialog Box

The Rectangular Orifice worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left
and an output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Centroid Elevation—The elevation of the center of the orifice cross section.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Discharge Coefficient—Orifice coefficient obtained from experimental data,
dependent on the shape of the orifice.
• Opening Width—Horizontal measurement of the orifice opening.
• Opening Height—Vertical measurement of the orifice opening.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water upstream of the orifice

measured from the orifice centroid.

3-70 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Tailwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water downstream of the

orifice measured from the orifice centroid (a negative value indicates that the tail-
water is below the centroid elevation).
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.

3.11.2 Circular Orifice Dialog Box

The Circular Orifice worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and
an output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Centroid Elevation—The elevation of the center of the orifice cross section.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Discharge Coefficient—Orifice coefficient obtained from experimental data,
dependent on the shape of the orifice.
• Diameter—The inside diameter of a circular channel.

Output:

• Headwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water upstream of the orifice

measured from the orifice centroid.
• Tailwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water downstream of the
orifice measured from the orifice centroid (a negative value indicates that the tail-
water is below the centroid elevation).
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-71

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

3.11.3 Generic Orifice Dialog Box

The Generic Orifice worksheet dialog box comprises an input section on the left and
an output, or results, section on the right.

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Input

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Headwater Elevation—Water elevation upstream of the structure.
• Centroid Elevation—The elevation of the center of the orifice cross section.
• Tailwater Elevation—Water elevation downstream of the structure.
• Discharge Coefficient—Orifice coefficient obtained from experimental data,
dependent on the shape of the orifice.
• Opening Area—Area of the orifice opening.

Output

• Headwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water upstream of the orifice

measured from the orifice centroid.
• Tailwater Height Above Centroid—Height of the water downstream of the
orifice measured from the orifice centroid (a negative value indicates that the tail-
water is below the centroid elevation).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.

3.12 Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

The available inlet worksheets are as follows:

• “Grate Inlet in Sag Dialog Box”

• “Grate Inlet on Grade Dialog Box”
• “Curb Inlet in Sag Dialog Box”
• “Curb Inlet on Grade Dialog Box”
• “Ditch Inlet in Sag Dialog Box”
• “Ditch Inlet on Grade Dialog Box”
• “Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag Dialog Box”

3-72 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• “Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade Dialog Box”

• “Combination Inlet in Sag Dialog Box”
• “Combination Inlet on Grade Dialog Box”

3.12.1 Grate Inlet in Sag Dialog Box

The Uniform Flow tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results,
section on the right.

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Grate Inlet in Sag”

• “Grate Tab—Grate Inlet in Sag”
• “Output—Grate Inlet in Sag”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Grate Inlet in Sag

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-73

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

Grate Tab—Grate Inlet in Sag

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.
• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location
of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.
• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,
which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:
– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85° Tilt Bar
– P-30
– P-50
– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%,100%].
100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow inter-
ception.

Output—Grate Inlet in Sag

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.

3-74 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of

the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Open Grate Area—Clear opening of the grate used when the grate acts as an
orifice (at high water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway), the opening ratio, which accounts for the bars of
the grate reducing the opening area (specific to each grate type), and the clogging
factor (accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging
by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely
clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow interception).
• Active Grate Weir Length—Weir length of the grate used when the grate acts as
a weir (at low water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway), and the clogging factor (accounts for the reduc-
tion in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The
valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in
no flow interception).

3.12.2 Grate Inlet on Grade Dialog Box

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Grate Inlet on Grade”

• “Grate Tab—Grate Inlet on Grade”
• “Output—Grate Inlet on Grade”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-75

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

Gutter Tab—Grate Inlet on Grade

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length. In Irregular Sections, the vertical drop is measured from low point
to low point.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.
• Manning’s Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

Grate Tab—Grate Inlet on Grade

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Efficiency—Ratio of the Intercepted Flow by the inlet over the total gutter flow.
The range is [0,1].
• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.
• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,
which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:
– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85 °Tilt Bar

3-76 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

– P-30
– P-50
– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%, 100%].
100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow inter-
ception.

Output—Grate Inlet on Grade

• Intercepted Flow—Portion of the flow in the gutter that is captured by the inlet
(the remaining portion of the flow that is not intercepted is called bypass flow).
Note that the amount of flow intercepted by an inlet in sag is assumed to be 100%.
• Bypass Flow—Portion of the flow that is not captured by the inlet. The bypass
flow is generally captured by inlets downstream. Note that the amount of flow
bypassed from an inlet in sag is assumed to be 0.
• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Splash Over Velocity—Gutter velocity where splash-over first occurs. The
splash-over velocity is a function of the Grate Type and the Grate Length.
• Frontal Flow Factor—Ratio of frontal flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total
frontal flow.
• Side Flow Factor—Ratio of side flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total side
flow.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-77

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Grate Flow Ratio—Ratio of frontal flow (portion of flow Qw that is in the gutter
within the width of the grate) to total flow.
• Active Grate Length—Length of the side of the grate that is parallel to the curb
(grate length) reduced by the clogging factor.

La = Lg (1-f) (3.1)

Where La = Active grate length (m, ft)

Lg = Length of the grate (m, ft)

f = Clogging factor (unitless, f = 1.0 means

that the grate is completely clogged

3.12.3 Curb Inlet in Sag Dialog Box

This dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Curb Inlet in Sag”

• “Curb Tab—Curb Inlet in Sag”
• “Output—Curb Inlet in Sag”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Curb Inlet in Sag

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.

3-78 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional

plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.

Curb Tab—Curb Inlet in Sag

The Curb tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Curb Opening Length—Length of the opening of the curb inlet (measured in the
direction of the street).
• Opening Height—Vertical measurement of the orifice opening.
• Curb Throat Type—3 types of curb inlets are defined:
– Horizontal throat (most common curb inlet)
– Vertical throat
– Inclined throat

• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location

of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.
• Throat Incline Angle—Angle of the curb opening throat (measured from the
vertical).

Output—Curb Inlet in Sag

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-79

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

3.12.4 Curb Inlet on Grade Dialog Box

The curb inlet on grade worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Curb Inlet on Grade”

• “Curb Tab—Curb Inlet on Grade”
• “Output—Curb Inlet on Grade”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Curb Inlet on Grade

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length. In Irregular Sections, the vertical drop is measured from low point
to low point.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.
• Roughness Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

Curb Tab—Curb Inlet on Grade

The Curb tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Efficiency—Ratio of the Intercepted Flow by the inlet over the total gutter flow.
The range is [0,1].
• Curb Opening Length—Length of the opening of the curb inlet (measured in the
direction of the street).

3-80 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location

of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.

Output—Curb Inlet on Grade

• Intercepted Flow—Portion of the flow in the gutter that is captured by the inlet
(the remaining portion of the flow that is not intercepted is called bypass flow).
Note that the amount of flow intercepted by an inlet in sag is assumed to be 100%.
• Bypass Flow—Portion of the flow that is not captured by the inlet. The bypass
flow is generally captured by inlets downstream. Note that the amount of flow
bypassed from an inlet in sag is assumed to be 0.
• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Equivalent Cross Slope—An imaginary straight cross-slope having a convey-
ance capacity equal to that of the given compound cross-slope.
• Length Factor—Ratio of curb opening length (length of the opening of the curb
inlet, measured in the direction of the street) over total interception length (length,
LT of the curb opening that would be required to intercept 100% of the flow).
• Total Interception Length—Length (LT) of the curb opening that would be
required to intercept 100% of the flow.

3.12.5 Ditch Inlet in Sag Dialog Box

The ditch inlet in sag worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Ditch Tab—Ditch Inlet in Sag”

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-81

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• “Grate Tab—Ditch Inlet in Sag”

• “Output—Ditch Inlet in Sag”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Ditch Tab—Ditch Inlet in Sag

The Ditch tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Left Side Slope—Slope of the left side of the channel.
• Right Side Slope—Slope of the right side of the channel.
• Bottom Width—For a regular channel, width of the bottom of a channel cross
section.

Grate Tab—Ditch Inlet in Sag

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.
• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location
of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.
• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,
which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:

3-82 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85° Tilt Bar
– P-30
– P-50
– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%,
100%]. 100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow
interception.

Output—Ditch Inlet in Sag

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Open Grate Area—Clear opening of the grate used when the grate acts as an
orifice (at high water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway), the opening ratio, which accounts for the bars of
the grate reducing the opening area (specific to each grate type), and the clogging
factor (accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging
by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely
clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow interception).
• Active Grate Weir Length—Weir length of the grate used when the grate acts as
a weir (at low water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway), and the clogging factor (accounts for the reduc-
tion in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The
valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in
no flow interception).

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-83

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

3.12.6 Ditch Inlet on Grade Dialog Box

The ditch inlet on grade worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Ditch Tab—Ditch Inlet on Grade”

• “Grate Tab—Ditch Inlet on Grade”
• “Output—Ditch Inlet on Grade”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Ditch Tab—Ditch Inlet on Grade

The Ditch tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Manning’s Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length.
• Left Side Slope—Slope of the left side of the channel.
• Right Side Slope—Slope of the right side of the channel.
• Bottom Width—For a regular channel, width of the bottom of a channel cross
section.
• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

Grate Tab—Ditch Inlet on Grade

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Efficiency—Ratio of the Intercepted Flow by the inlet over the total gutter flow.
The range is [0,1].
• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.

3-84 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,

which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:
– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85° Tilt Bar
– P-30
– P-50
– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%,
100%]. 100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow
interception.

Output—Ditch Inlet on Grade

• Intercepted Flow—Portion of the flow in the gutter that is captured by the inlet
(the remaining portion of the flow that is not intercepted is called bypass flow).
Note that the amount of flow intercepted by an inlet in sag is assumed to be 100%.
• Bypass Flow—Portion of the flow that is not captured by the inlet. The bypass
flow is generally captured by inlets downstream. Note that the amount of flow
bypassed from an inlet in sag is assumed to be 0.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Wetted Perimeter—Perimeter of flow that travels against a solid boundary. For a
partially full pipe, the wetted perimeter includes all of the flow perimeter except
for the top segment, which has a free surface.
• Top Width—Length of the free top surface on the flowing cross section. For a
cross section flowing full, this value is zero.
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Splash Over Velocity—Gutter velocity where splash-over first occurs. The
splash-over velocity is a function of the Grate Type and the Grate Length.
• Frontal Flow Factor—Ratio of frontal flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total
frontal flow.
• Side Flow Factor—Ratio of side flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total side
flow.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-85

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Grate Flow Ratio—Ratio of frontal flow (portion of flow Qw that is in the gutter
within the width of the grate) to total flow.
• Active Grate Length—Length of the side of the grate that is parallel to the curb
(grate length) reduced by the clogging factor.

La = Lg (1-f) (3.2)

Where La = Active grate length (m, ft)

Lg = Length of the grate (m, ft)

f = Clogging factor (unitless, f = 1.0 means

that the grate is completely clogged

• Critical Depth—Depth of water in the channel for which the specific energy is at
its minimum. Specific Energy is the sum of the elevation head and velocity head
(energy due to the velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Critical Slope—Channel slope for which the uniform flow (equilibrium flow for
which the slope of total energy equals the channel slope) is critical.
• Froude Number—Dimensionless parameter used to characterize open channel
flow. For critical flow, this value is 1.
• Flow Type—The flow is defined as:
– Supercritical if F > 1
– Subcritical if F < 1
– Critical if F = 1
where F is the Froude Number.
• Specific Energy—Sum of the elevation head and velocity head (energy due to the
velocity of a liquid) as related to the section of a channel bed.
• Velocity Head—Energy due to the velocity of a liquid.

3.12.7 Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag Dialog Box

The slotted drain inlet in sag worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag”

• “Slot Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag”
• “Output—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag”

3-86 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.

Slot Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag

The Slot tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section on
the right.

Input:

• Slot Width—Width (W) of the slot length opening.

• Slot Length—Length of the slot inlet opening.
• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location
of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.

Output—Slotted Drain Inlet in Sag

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-87

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of

the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Open Slot Area—Area of the slot opening used in the case of orifice flow.

3.12.8 Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade Dialog Box

The slotted drain inlet on grade worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade”

• “Slot Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade”
• “Output—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.
• Manning’s Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

3-88 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Slot Tab—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade

The Slot tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section on
the right.

Input:

• Efficiency—Ratio of the Intercepted Flow by the inlet over the total gutter flow.
The range is [0,1].
• Slot Length—Length of the slot inlet opening.
• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location
of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.

Output—Slotted Drain Inlet on Grade

• Intercepted Flow—Portion of the flow in the gutter that is captured by the inlet
(the remaining portion of the flow that is not intercepted is called bypass flow).
Note that the amount of flow intercepted by an inlet in sag is assumed to be 100%.
• Bypass Flow—Portion of the flow that is not captured by the inlet. The bypass
flow is generally captured by inlets downstream. Note that the amount of flow
bypassed from an inlet in sag is assumed to be 0.
• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Equivalent Cross Slope—An imaginary straight cross-slope having a convey-
ance capacity equal to that of the given compound cross-slope.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-89

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

• Length Factor—Ratio of curb opening length (length of the opening of the curb
inlet, measured in the direction of the street) over total interception length (length,
LT of the curb opening that would be required to intercept 100% of the flow).
• Total Interception Length—Length (LT) of the curb opening that would be
required to intercept 100% of the flow.

3.12.9 Combination Inlet in Sag Dialog Box

The combination inlet in sag worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag”

• “Inlet Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag”
• “Grate Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag”
• “Curb Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag”
• “Output—Combination Inlet in Sag”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.

3-90 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Inlet Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag

The Inlet tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section on
the right.

Input:

• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location

of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.

Grate Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.
• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,
which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:
– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85° Tilt Bar
– P-30
– P-50
– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%,
100%]. 100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow
interception.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-91

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

Curb Tab—Combination Inlet in Sag

The Curb tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Curb Opening Length—Length of the opening of the curb inlet (measured in the
direction of the street).
• Opening Height—Vertical measurement of the orifice opening.
• Curb Throat Type—3 types of curb inlets are defined:
– Horizontal throat (most common curb inlet)
– Vertical throat
– Inclined throat

• Throat Incline Angle—Angle of the curb opening throat (measured from the
vertical).

Output—Combination Inlet in Sag

• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Open Grate Area—Clear opening of the grate used when the grate acts as an
orifice (at high water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway), the opening ratio, which accounts for the bars of
the grate reducing the opening area (specific to each grate type), and the clogging
factor (accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging
by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely
clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow interception).
• Active Grate Weir Length—Weir length of the grate used when the grate acts as
a weir (at low water depth). This is a function of the grate length (total length of
the grate inlet, including bars, measured in the road direction), the grate width
(total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars, measured in the cross-

3-92 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

sectional plane of the roadway), and the clogging factor (accounts for the reduc-
tion in efficiency of the inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The
valid range is [0,1]. 1 corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in
no flow interception).

3.12.10 Combination Inlet on Grade Dialog Box

The combination inlet on grade worksheet dialog box comprises the following tabs:

• “Gutter Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade”

• “Inlet Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade”
• “Grate Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade”
• “Curb Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade”
• “Output—Combination Inlet on Grade”

Additionally, a Messages tab is included in each worksheet. The top section of this tab
displays informational calculation messages, while the bottom section lets you enter
any explanatory notes that you wish to be associated with the worksheet.

Gutter Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade

The Gutter tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Discharge—Volumetric rate of flow, given in units of length (cubed) over time.

• Slope—Longitudinal slope in the channel. Also the vertical drop divided by the
channel length.
• Gutter Width—Width of the gutter (W) measured from the curb face to the break
in slope of the roadway pavement.
• Gutter Cross Slope—Slope (Sw) of the gutter, measured in the cross-sectional
plane of the roadway. If the roadway section is uniform (no gutter depression),
then you can leave the gutter width to 0.0 as well as the gutter cross-slope.
• Road Cross Slope—Slope (Sx) of the road pavement, measured in the cross-
sectional plane of the roadway.
• Manning’s Coefficient—Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-93

Inlet Worksheet Dialog Boxes

Inlet Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade

The Inlet tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section on
the right.

Input:

• Local Depression—Depth of a gutter depression a’ existing only at the location

of the inlet.
• Local Depression Width—Horizontal width of the locally depressed gutter. In
the case of a continuously depressed gutter, the larger of the local depression
width and gutter width is used to calculate the inlet efficiency.
• Efficiency—Ratio of the Intercepted Flow by the inlet over the total gutter flow.
The range is [0,1].

Grate Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade

The Grate tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Grate Width—Total width of the grate inlet, which includes the bars (measured
in the cross-sectional plane of the roadway).
• Grate Length—Total length of the grate inlet, including bars (measured in the
road direction). The default values for the range of Grate Length are 0.5 ft – 4.5 ft.
To change these defaults: right click on the Grate Length field, choose Grate
Length Properties and change the maximum and minimum value allowed.
• Grate Type—The HEC-22 methodology contains 8 different types of grates,
which defines their geometry (spacing, shape of the bars, etc.). The grate type
affect the inlet efficiency. The types defined by HEC-22 are:
– Curved Vane
– 30° – 45° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 60° Tilt Bar
– 45° – 85° Tilt Bar
– P-30
– P-50

3-94 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

– P-50 x 100
– Reticuline

• Clogging—The clogging factor accounts for the reduction in efficiency of the

inlet due to partial clogging by debris, leaves, etc. The valid range is [0%,
100%]. 100% corresponds to a completely clogged grate inlet, resulting in no flow
interception.

Curb Tab—Combination Inlet on Grade

The Curb tab comprises an input section on the left and an output, or results, section
on the right.

Input:

• Curb Opening Length—Length of the opening of the curb inlet (measured in the
direction of the street).

Output—Combination Inlet on Grade

• Intercepted Flow—Portion of the flow in the gutter that is captured by the inlet
(the remaining portion of the flow that is not intercepted is called bypass flow).
Note that the amount of flow intercepted by an inlet in sag is assumed to be 100%.
• Bypass Flow—Portion of the flow that is not captured by the inlet. The bypass
flow is generally captured by inlets downstream. Note that the amount of flow
bypassed from an inlet in sag is assumed to be 0.
• Spread—A measure of the transverse lateral distance (T) from the curb face to
the limit of the water flowing on the roadway.
• Depth—Distance from water level to low point of channel bottom.
• Flow Area—Cross sectional area of flow.
• Gutter Depression—Used for Composite Gutter Section. This is the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face. The gutter depression applies to gutters that are continu-
ously depressed (as opposed to local depression that applies to a depression of the
gutter at the location of the inlet only).
• Total Depression—Total of the local depression (Depth of a gutter depression a’
existing only at the location of the inlet) and the gutter depression (the depth a of
the gutter measured at the curb face, from the projection of the pavement cross-
slope at the curb face).
• Velocity—Linear measure of flow rate given in units of length over time.
• Splash Over Velocity—Gutter velocity where splash-over first occurs. The
splash-over velocity is a function of the Grate Type and the Grate Length.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-95

Combination Inlet Options Dialog Box

• Frontal Flow Factor—Ratio of frontal flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total
frontal flow.
• Side Flow Factor—Ratio of side flow intercepted by the grate inlet to total side
flow.
• Grate Flow Ratio—Ratio of frontal flow (portion of flow Qw that is in the gutter
within the width of the grate) to total flow.
• Equivalent Cross Slope—An imaginary straight cross-slope having a convey-
ance capacity equal to that of the given compound cross-slope.
• Active Grate Length—Length of the side of the grate that is parallel to the curb
(grate length) reduced by the clogging factor.

La = Lg (1-f) (3.3)

Where La = Active grate length (m, ft)

Lg = Length of the grate (m, ft)

f = Clogging factor (unitless, f = 1.0 means

that the grate is completely clogged

• Length Factor—Ratio of curb opening length (length of the opening of the curb
inlet, measured in the direction of the street) over total interception length (length,
LT of the curb opening that would be required to intercept 100% of the flow).
• Total Interception Length—Length (LT) of the curb opening that would be
required to intercept 100% of the flow.

3.13 Combination Inlet Options Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you modify certain calculation options. The controls available to
do this are as follows:

• Calculation Option—This menu lets you use the curb inlet, grate inlet, or both
during the calculations.
• Grate Flow Option—This menu lets you exclude front flow, side flow, or neither
duing the calculations.

3-96 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3.14 Rating Table Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define the parameters of a rating table for the associated
worksheet.

The dialog includes a tabular grid and the following control buttons:

• Insert—Creates a new row in the tabular grid.

• Delete—Deletes the selected row in the tabular grid.

The tabular grid contains the following columns:

• Attribute—This drop-down list lets you choose the attribute to which the rating
table will be applied. The options include:
– Roughness Coefficient
– Channel Slope
– Normal Depth
– Bottom Width
– Right/Left-Side Slope

• Minimum—The lower limit of the user-specified range.

• Maximum—The upper limit of the user-specified range.
• Increment—This value determines how the range determined by the Minimum
and Maximum values is broken down.

3.14.1 Rating Table Dialog Box

The Rating Table dialog box displays the result of the rating table defined in the
Rating Table Setup dialog box. The following buttons are available:

• Define Rating Table—This button opens the Rating Table Setup dialog box,
letting you redefine the table parameters.
• Print Preview—This button opens the print preview dialog box, displaying the
current rating table as it will be printed.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-97

Rating Curve Setup Dialog Box

3.15 Rating Curve Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you plot one or more curves for each worksheet. You can plot a
single curve or a family of curves. The following controls are available:

• Varying (check box)—When this box is checked, the Varying fields become
active, allowing another attribute (for a total of three) to be plotted.
• Plot (drop-down list)—The attribute along the y (vertical) axis.
• Vs (drop-down list)—The attribute along the x (horizontal) axis.
• Minimum—The lower limit of the user-specified range for the associated
attribute.
• Maximum—The upper limit of the user-specified range for the associated
attribute.
• Increment—This value determines how the range determined by the Minimum
and Maximum values is broken down.
• Varying—When the Family of Curves check box is checked, this menu lets you
choose a third attribute to plot.
• Minimum—The lower limit of the user-specified range for the associated
attribute.
• Maximum—The upper limit of the user-specified range for the associated
attribute.
• Increment—This value determines how the range determined by the Minimum
and Maximum values is broken down.

3.15.1 Rating Curve Dialog Box

The rating curve dialog box displays the result of the rating table defined in the Rating
Curve Setup dialog box. The following buttons are available:

• Define Rating Curve—This button opens the Rating Curve Setup dialog box,
letting you redefine the table parameters.
• Print Preview—This button opens the print preview dialog box, displaying the
current rating table as it will be printed.
• Chart Options—This button opens the TeeChart Editor dialog box, letting you
modify the graph display options.

3-98 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3.16 Cross Section Report Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you modify the display settings of the cross section report. The
following controls are available:

• Report Title—Enter the title for your report; the title displays at the top of the
printed report.
• Aspect Ratio—This control is inactive unless the Manual Scale box is
[Link] determines the scale of the cross section diagram. It increases or
decreases the size of the diagram relative to the default value of 1. This option is
not available for irregular cross sections.
• Manual Scale—Clicking this check box activates the Aspect Ratio control,
letting you increase or decrease the size of the cross section diagram. This option
is not available for irregular cross sections.

3.17 Cross Section Dialog Box

This dialog box displays a cross section of the current element using the settings
defined in the Cross Section Report Setup dialog box. The dialog box contains the
following buttons:

• Print Preview—This command opens the Print Preview dialog box, displaying
the cross section as it will appear when it is printed.
• Options—This command opens the Cross Section Report Setup dialog box,
letting you change the report settings.

Irregular cross-sections are displayed on a grid.

3.18 Irregular Section Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define a cross section for the associated irregular section. The
dialog box comprises the following sections:

• Section Geometry—This section of the dialog box lets you specify the points that
allow you to define the channel shape. A point is defined by entering a station
value along with the elevation at that station point. The following controls are
available in this section of the dialog box:
– Insert (button)—This button creates a new point in the section table.
– Delete (button)—This button deletes the selected point from the section table.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-99

Weighted Roughness Method Dialog Box

– Station (column)—This column lets you enter the station for which the asso-
ciated elevation applies in the cross section.
– Elevation (column)—This column lets you define the elevation for the asso-
ciated station to define a point in the cross section.

• Segment Roughness—This section of the dialog box lets you define the rough-
ness along specific segments of the cross section. Each segment can be assigned a
different roughness value.
– Insert (button)—This button creates a new point in the section table.
– Delete (button)—This button deletes the selected point from the section table.
– Start Station—This column contains a menu containing all of the available
station points. By defining this point and the end point, a segment can be
defined, and a roughness coefficient can then be applied to this segment.
– End Station—This column contains a menu containing all of the available
station points. By defining this point and the start point, a segment can be
defined, and a roughness coefficient can then be applied to this segment.
– Roughness Coefficient—The roughness value (Manning’s) that is to be asso-
ciated with the segment defined by the start and end station values.

• Section Plot—This section of the dialog box displays a continuously updated

diagram of the cross section that is defined in the Sections table. Segments appear
red when no roughness has been defined in the Segment section, and appear green
when roughness values have been defined.

3.19 Weighted Roughness Method Dialog Box

The Weighted Roughness Method dialog box lets you define the roughness method
that will be used in the calculations. Separate methods can be chosen for open and
closed channels. The currently specified method is displayed in the Current Rough-
ness Method field. The following methods are available:

3.19.1 Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods

Bentley FlowMaster uses the following weighting methods:

• Pavlovskii’s Method—The Pavlovskii method may be used for open channel as

well as closed top irregular channels.

3-100 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

(3.4)

Where n = Roughness coefficient

P = Weighted perimeter
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section

• Horton’s Method—The Horton composite roughness equation is normally used

for solving closed top irregular channels such as custom arches or cunnette
conduit sections. This equation is also applied in certain specific situations to
open channels where steep banks or wide flat floodplains are encountered.

(3.5)

Where n = Roughness coefficient

P = Wetted perimeter
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section

• Colebatch Method—The Colebatch equation is normally used for open, irregular

channels such as natural floodplains.

(3.6)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-101

Weighted Roughness Method Dialog Box

Where n = Roughness coefficient

A = Flow area
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section

• Cox Method—The Cox equation is normally used for open, irregular channels
such as natural floodplains.

(3.7)

Where n = Roughness coefficient

A = Flow area
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section

• Lotter Method—The Lotter equation is normally used for open, irregular chan-
nels such as natural floodplains.

(3.8)

3-102 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Where n = Roughness coefficient

P = Wetted perimeter
R = Hydraulic radius
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section

• Improved Lotter Method—This method uses a combination of the Horton and

Lotter equations. Because both methods are based on Manning’s conveyance
equations, it is recommended that you use Manning’s friction method for irregular
channels. For more information, see “Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO
Users” on page 3-103.

3.19.2 Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users

Improved Lotter Method uses a weighted roughness method for solving uniform flow
equations unlike most standard step backwater programs (HEC-2, WSP-2, and
WSPRO), which use a segmented conveyance method. Improved Lotter weighted
roughness method is more general and, unlike the step backwater programs, can be
used for both open channel sections and closed sections. Improved Lotter Method will
produce results similar to the segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
WSPRO) except for the following two cases:

Sections containing steep vertical segments or flat shallow submerged overbanks

intersected by water surface. The segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
and WSPRO) tends to underestimate effective roughness, and in many instances the
effective weighted roughness will be actually lower than any of the input segment
roughnesses. Bentley FlowMaster's weighted roughness method avoids underesti-
mating effective roughness by combining adjacent segments using Horton's equation
in a manner similar to the method applied for subdivided main channels with banks
steeper than 5H:1V as documented in Section 2.3 of the HEC-2 User's Manual
(September, 1990). Unlike HEC-2, Improved Lotter Method does not confine this
correction to the main channel, but will make this adjustment at any location in the
section. Improved Lotter Method also dynamically adjusts its flatness and steepness
checks ensuring that computed roughness values will always be higher than the
minimum input value encountered over the wetter flow area. For these situations,
Improved Lotter Method yields a higher effective weighted roughness for the total
section than the segmented conveyance method.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-103

Options Dialog Box

3.20 Options Dialog Box

The Options dialog box contains two tabs:

• “Options Dialog Box - FlexUnits Tab”

• “Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab”

3.20.1 Options Dialog Box - FlexUnits Tab

The FlexUnits tab lets you modify the unit settings for the current project. Click Tools
> Options to open the FlexUnits tab in the Options dialog box.

The FlexUnits tab contains the following controls:

• Save As—This button lets you setup your own set of unit defaults, so you can
load them in later. Save As saves the defaults as an XML file that you can edit in
an XML editor or text editor, such as Notepad.
• Load—This button lets you open your own set of custom unit defaults. These
defaults are saved as an XML file, which you can create using Save As.
• Reset Defaults SI—This button sets the unit system used by the current project to
SI.
• Reset Defaults US—This button sets the unit system used by the current project
to U.S. customary.
• Default Unit System for New Project—Sets the default unit system used by
future new projects, not for the current project.

The table comprises the following columns:

• Formatter—Parameter measured by the unit.

• Unit—Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type,
click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option also lets you use both
US Customary and SI units in the same worksheet.
• Display Precision—Rounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after
the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of
10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a
number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point.
• Format—Select the format for your numbering. For more information, see “Set
Field Options Dialog Box” on page 3-112.
• Default Unit System for New Project—Sets the default unit system used by
future new projects, not for the current project.

3-104 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3.20.2 Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab

Note: These settings affect ProjectWise users only.

The ProjectWise tab contains options for using FlowMaster with ProjectWise. This
tab contains the following controls:

• Default Datasource—Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If you have

not yet logged into a datasource, this field will display <login>. To change the
datasource, click the Ellipses (...) button to open the Change Datasource dialog
box. If you click Cancel after you have changed the default datasource, the new
default datasource is retained.
• Update server on Save—When this is checked, any time you save your Flow-
Master project locally using the File > Save menu command, the files on your
ProjectWise server will also be updated and all changes to the files will immedi-
ately become visible to other ProjectWise users. This option is turned off by
default.

Note: This option, when turned on, can significantly affect

performance, especially for large, complex projects.

For more information about using FlowMaster with ProjectWise, see “Considerations
for ProjectWise Users” on page 3-113

3.21 Project Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you view and modify project information, including the date,
engineer, filename, and any notes associated with the project. Click Project > Project
Properties to open the Project Properties dialog box.

• Categorized (button)—Click this to display the categories in the Project Proper-

ties dialog box (Misc. is the only category).
• Alphabetic (button)—Click this to display the Project Properties alphabetically
without categories.
• Project Engineer—This field lets you enter the project engineer’s name.
• Project Company—This field lets you enter your company’s name, which will
appear on the bottom of all reports associated with the current project. This is an
optional field.
• Company Logo—This field lets you select a logo (.bmp file) to display at the
bottom of all reports associated with the current project. Click in this field to
display an Ellipses button, which lets you browse your computer for the appro-
priate logo. This is an optional field.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-105

GVF Profile Dialog Box

• Project Notes—This field lets you enter any notes that you wish to be associated
with the project.
• Project Date—This field is automatically populated with the date and time that
the project was created. The data in this field can be modified by clicking the
arrow button on the right side of the field and selecting a date on the calendar that
appears.
• Project Filename—This field is automatically populated with the file name and
location of the project file. Bentley FlowMaster creates data files with the format:
yourfilename.fm8 and [Link]. By default, projects are saved to
your \My Documents directory, but you can save them to any directory that you
specify.

3.22 GVF Profile Dialog Box

The GVF Profile dialog box displays a diagram of the calculated gradually-varied
profile. A Print Preview button is available, letting you see what the profile will look
like when it is printed.

To view a GVF profile:

1. Create a new worksheet.

2. Enter the data.
3. Click Solve.
4. Click the GVF Profile button.

3.23 GVF Profile Table Dialog Box

The GVF Profile Table dialog box displays the results of the gradually-varied flow
calculations in a tabular format.

To view a GVF profile table:

1. Create a new worksheet.

2. Enter the data.
3. Click Solve.
4. Click the GVF Profile Table button.

The columns in the table are as follows:

• Distance
• Depth

3-106 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

• Invert Elevation
• Flow Area
• Wetted Perimeter
• Velocity
• Specific Energy

A Print Preview button is available, letting you see what the report will look like when
it is printed.

3.24 Tabular Reports

The tabular report dialog box displays all available input data and results for each of
the worksheet types. The attributes that are reported will vary according to the type of
element being calculated.

You can customize tabular reports in the following ways:

• Change the report title

• Add and remove columns
• Move columns
• Resize columns
• Change column headings
• Copy data to the Windows clipboard
• Sort the contents of a column
• Filter the contents of a table
•

3.24.1 Tabular Report Dialog Box

The tabular report dialog box displays all available input data and results for each of
the worksheet types. The attributes that are reported will vary according to the type of
element being calculated.

The following controls are available in the Tabular Reports dialog box:

• Copy—This button lets you copy the contents of the selected table cell, rows, and/
or columns for the purpose of pasting into a text editing program such as Notepad.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-107

Tabular Reports

• Report—This button displays the Print Preview dialog box, which lets you see
what the report will look like when it is printed. For more information, see “Print
Preview Dialog Box” on page 3-111. When you click the Report button, you are
prompted to change the title of the report, if you wish.
• Edit—Opens the Tabular Report Setup dialog box, allowing you to make changes
to the format of the currently selected table. For more information, see “Tabular
Report Setup Dialog Box” on page 3-109.

Right-clicking on a column heading in the Tabular Reports displays a shortcut menu

containing the following commands:

• Units and Formatting—Displays the Set Field Options dialog box, letting you
change the units, display precision, and format of the data displayed in the
currently selected column. For more information, see “Set Field Options Dialog
Box” on page 3-112.
• Edit Column Label—Lets you change the text of a column label. Right-click the
column whose label you want to change, then select this command and type the
new name for the label ion the Edit Column Label dialog box. Click OK to save
those changes and close the dialog box or Cancel to exit without making any
changes.
• Sort—Displays a submenu containing the following sorting commands:
– Sort Ascending—Sorts the contents of the currently-selected column alpha-
betically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts numerically from negative to
positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected check boxes to the top and cleared
ones to the bottom.
– Sort Descending—Sorts the contents of the currently-selected column alpha-
betically from Z to A, from top to bottom. Sorts numerically from positive to
negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared check boxes to the top and
selected ones to the bottom.
– Custom—Displays the Custom Sort dialog box, which lets you select one or
more attribute by which to sort the contents of the selected column. For more
information, see “Custom Sort Dialog Box” on page 3-110.
• Filter—Displays a submenu containing the following commands:
– Quick Filter—Displays the Filter dialog box, which lets you filter the
contents of the tabular report by the currently-selected column. For example,
if you wanted to view data only for trapezoidal channels with a normal depth
greater than or equal to 5 feet, you would create a quick filter by right-clicking
the Normal Depth column, then selecting Filter > Quick Filter to display the
Filter dialog box. You would then set the operator to >= and the value to 5 and
click OK; only the data for channels that meet your filter criteria will be
displayed.

3-108 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

– Custom—Displays the Filter dialog box, which lets you set up a custom filter
based on one or more criteria. For more information, see “Filter Dialog” on
page 3-110.
– Reset—Turns off the active filter, causing all available rows in the table to be
displayed.

3.24.2 Tabular Report Setup Dialog Box

The Tabular Report Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the
following options:

• Available Columns—Contains all the attributes that are available for your table
design. The Available Columns list is located on the left side of the dialog box.
This list contains all of the attributes that are available for the type of table you are
creating. The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-editable attributes,
while those displayed in white represent editable attributes.
• Selected Columns—Contains attributes that appear in your custom designed
tabular report. When you open the table, the selected attributes appear as columns
in the table in the same order that they appear in the list. You can drag and drop or
use the up and down buttons to change the order of the attributes in the table.
The Selected Columns list is located on the right-hand side of the Tabular Report
Setup dialog box. To add columns to the Selected Columns list, select one or more
attributes in the Available Columns list, then click the Add button [>] or drag and
drop the highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.

• Column Manipulation Buttons—Lets you select or clear columns to be used in

the table, as well as to arrange the order in which the columns appear. The Add
and Remove buttons are located in the center of the dialog box.
– [ > ]—Adds the selected items from the Available Columns list to the Selected
Columns list.
– [ >> ]—Adds all of the items in the Available Columns list to the Selected
Columns list.
– [ < ]—Removes the selected items from the Selected Columns list.
– [ << ]—Removes all items from the Selected Columns list.

Note: You can select multiple attributes in the Available Columns list
by holding down the Shift key or the Control key while clicking
with the mouse. Holding down the Shift key provides group
selection behavior. Holding down the Control key provides
single element selection behavior.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-109

Tabular Reports

To rearrange the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list, highlight the item
to be moved, then move it up or down in the list by dragging or clicking the up or
down button located below the Selected Columns list.

3.24.3 Custom Sort Dialog Box

When you perform a Custom Sort in a tabular report, the Custom Sort dialog box
opens, letting you select one or more attributes by which to sort the contents of the
selected column.

The Custom Sort dialog box contains a table in which you define custom sort keys,
and the following controls:

• Insert—Inserts a new row into the table. Each row in the table represents a sepa-
rate sort key.
• Delete—Deletes the current row (and sort key) from the table.

Each sort key contains two parts:

• Attribute—The attribute to sort. You can select any field in the tabular report
from a drop-down list.
• Sort Order—The order in which to sort the selected attribute’s values. Select
Ascending or Descending.

3.24.4 Filter Dialog

When you perform a Quick Filter or a Custom Filter in a tabular report, the Filter
Editor dialog opens, letting you specify one or more filter criteria.

The Filter dialog box contains a table, each row of which represents a filter criterion,
and the following controls:

• Insert—Inserts a new row into the table. Each row in the table represents a sepa-
rate filter criterion.
• Delete—Deletes the current row (and filter criterion) from the table.

Each filter criterion contains three parts:

• Attribute—The attribute to filter.

• Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, <>).
• Value—The comparison value.

3-110 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

Any number of criterion elements can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are
implicitly joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criterian are
defined, only rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will
remain active for the associated table until the filter is reset.

3.25 Print Preview Dialog Box

The Print Preview dialog box lets you see the current view of the chart as it will be
printed, and to define the print settings. The following controls are available in this
dialog box:

• Table of Contents (button)—Displays the table of contents for the current pump
chart.
• Print (button)—Prints the current chart as it appears in the preview pane.
• Copy (button)—Copies the text from the Print Preview dialog box to the
Windows clipboard. You can paste (Ctrl+V) the data into other software, such as a
word-processing application or Notepad.
• Find (button)—Lets you search for words and phrases in the chart displayed in
the preview pane.
• Single Page View (button)—Displays a single page in the preview pane.
• Multiple Page View (button)—Lets you display multiple pages simultaneously in
the preview pane.
• Zoom Out (button)—Magnifies the current view in the preview pane; you can
only use this with single-page view.
• Zoom In (button)—Reduces in the current view in the preview pane; you can
only use this with single-page view.
• Zoom (drop-down list)—Lets you select the magnification level of the current
view in the preview pane.
• Previous Page (button)—Returns the report to the previous page.
• Next Page (button)—Advances the report to the next page.
• Current Page Number—Displays the current page number and the total pages in
the current preview.
• Backward/Forward (buttons)—Let you navigate to and from pages you have
already viewed.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-111

Set Field Options Dialog Box

3.26 Set Field Options Dialog Box

The Set Field Options dialog box lets you view and edit the unit, display precision,
and format of the data displayed in the corresponding attribute field. To open this
dialog box, right-click any unit in any Bentley FlowMaster dialog box and select
Units and Formatting. (For more information, see “Options Dialog Box” on page 3-
104.)

The Set Field Options dialog box comprises the following components:

• Value (field)—This non-editable field displays a preview of the appearance of the

current unit when the current field options are applied.
• Units (drop-down list)—This menu lets you select the units used by the current
field.
• Display Precision (field)—This field lets you define the display precision for the
current field. The display precision setting can be used to control the number of
digits displayed after the decimal point, or the rounding of numbers. Enter a nega-
tive number to specify rounding to the nearest power of 10. (-1) rounds to the
nearest 10, (-2) rounds to the nearest 100, and so on. For example, if the display
precision is set to (-3), a value of 1234567.89 displays as 1235000.
• Format (drop-down list)—This menu lets you select the display format used by
the current field. Choices include:

– Scientific—When using scientific format, the entered value is converted to a

string of the form “-[Link]...E+ddd” or “-[Link]...e+ddd”, where each 'd' indi-
cates a digit (0 – 9). The string starts with a minus sign if the number is nega-
tive.
– Fixed Point—Fixed point format abides by the display precision setting, and
will automatically enter zeros after the decimal place to do so. With a display
precision of 3, an entered value of 3.5 will appear as 3.500.
– General—The general format truncates any zeros after the decimal point,
regardless of the display precision value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed Point format will appear as 5.2
when using General format. The number will also be rounded. So, an entered
value of 5.35 will appear as 5.4, regardless of the display precision.
– Number—When using the number format, the entered value is converted to a
string of the form “-d,ddd,[Link]...”, where each 'd' indicates a digit (0 – 9).
The string starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. Thousand sepa-
rators are inserted between each group of three digits to the left of the decimal
point.

3-112 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3.27 Considerations for ProjectWise Users

Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to FlowMaster content within a work-
group, across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals. When
ProjectWise is integrated with FlowMaster, project files can be accessed quickly,
checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within FlowMaster.

If ProjectWise is installed on your system, FlowMaster automatically installs all the

components necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your FlowMaster
projects.

To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.

To learn more about using ProjectWise with FlowMaster, see the following topics:

• “General Guidelines for using ProjectWise with FlowMaster” on page 3-113

• “Performing ProjectWise Operations from within FlowMaster” on page 3-114

3.27.1 General Guidelines for using ProjectWise with

FlowMaster

Follow these guidelines when using FlowMaster with ProjectWise:

• Use the File > ProjectWise commands to perform ProjectWise file operations,
such as Save, Open, and Change Datasource.
• The first time you choose one of the File > ProjectWise menu commands in your
current FlowMaster session, you are prompted to log into a ProjectWise data-
source. The datasource you log into remains the current datasource until you
change it using the File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource command.
• Use FlowMaster’s File > New command to create a new project. The project is not
stored in ProjectWise until you select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
• Use FlowMaster’s File > Open command to open a local copy of the current
project.
• Use FlowMaster’s File > Save command to save a copy of the current project to
your local computer.
• When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
– Check In—Updates the project in ProjectWise with your latest changes and
unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
– Unlock—Unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it but does
not update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any changes
you have made since the last server update.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-113

Considerations for ProjectWise Users

– Leave Out—Leaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and
retains any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on
your local computer. Select this option if you want to exit Bentley Flow-
Master but continue working on the project later.
• In the FlowMaster Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the Update
server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly affect
performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this is checked, any
time you save your FlowMaster project locally using the File > Save menu
command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users.
This option is turned off by default.
• In this release of FlowMaster, calculation result files are not managed inside
ProjectWise. A local copy of reulsts is maintained on your computer, but to ensure
accurate results you should recalculate projects when you first open them from
ProjectWise.
• FlowMaster projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most Recently
Used Files list (at the bottom of the File menu) in the following format:
pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/[Link]

3.27.2 Performing ProjectWise Operations from within

FlowMaster

You can quickly tell whether or not the current FlowMaster project is in ProjectWise
or not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the FlowMaster window. If the
current project is in ProjectWise, “pwname://” will appear in front of the file name in
the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear on the far right side of the status bar,
as shown below.

You can perform the following ProjectWise operations from within FlowMaster:

To save an open FlowMaster project to ProjectWise:

1. In FlowMaster, select File > ProjectWise > Save As.

2. If you haven’t already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.

3-114 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Environment

3. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
a. Click Change next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current
ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
b. Type the name of your FlowMaster project in the Name field. We recommend
that you keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the FlowMaster
project name as possible.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click OK.

To open a FlowMaster project from a ProjectWise datasource:

1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

2. If you haven’t already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.
3. In the ProjectWise Select Document dialog box, perform these steps:
a. From the Folder drop-down menu, select a folder that contains FlowMaster
projects.
b. In the Document list box, select a FlowMaster project.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click Open.

To copy an open FlowMaster project from one ProjectWise datasource to

another:

1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open to open a project stored in ProjectWise.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, select a different ProjectWise datasource,
then click Log in.
4. Select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
5. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, change information about the
project as required, then click OK.

To make a local copy of a FlowMaster project stored in a ProjectWise data-

source:

1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

2. If you haven’t already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 3-115

Considerations for ProjectWise Users

3. Select File > Save As.

4. Save the FlowMaster project to a folder on your local computer.

To change the default ProjectWise datasource:

1. Start FlowMaster.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource
you want to log into, then click Log in.

To use background layer files with ProjectWise:

• Using File > ProjectWise > Save As—If there are background files, you are
prompted with two options: you can copy the background layer files to the project
folder for use by the project, or you can remove the background references and
manually reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing
ProjectWise documents.
• Using File > ProjectWise > Open—This works the same as the normal Project-
Wise > Open command, except that background layer files are not locked in
ProjectWise for the current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with
other users at the same time.
• To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in Project Wise—
The ProjectWise Select Document dialog box opens, and you can choose any
existing ProjectWise document. You must have previously added these back-
ground layer files as described in the first bullet above, or by using the Project-
Wise Explorer.
• When you remove a background layer file reference from a project that exists in
ProjectWise, the reference to the file is removed but the file itself is not deleted
from ProjectWise.
• Using File > Save As—When you use File > Save As on a project that is already
in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, you are prompted with two
options: you can copy all the files to the local project folder for use by the project,
or you can remove the background references and manually reassign them after
you have saved the project locally.

3-116 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

How Do I… 4
This section provides step-by-step instructions for performing Bentley FlowMaster’s
most commonly used functions. These functions include the following:

• “Create A New Project” on page 4-118

• “Open an Existing Project” on page 4-119
• “Create a New Worksheet?” on page 4-119
• “Name a Worksheet” on page 4-120
• “Edit a Worksheet” on page 4-120
• “Create a Rating Table” on page 4-121
• “Plot Rating Curves” on page 4-122
• “Plot a Cross Section” on page 4-123
• “Print a Report” on page 4-123
• “Customize a Tabular Report” on page 4-124
• “Set Field Options (Unit, Precision, Format)” on page 4-127
• “Save a Project” on page 4-127
• “Exit Bentley FlowMaster” on page 4-127

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-117

Create A New Project

4.1 Create A New Project

When you first start Bentley FlowMaster, the Welcome dialog box opens, which lets
you create a new project. You can also create a new project from Bentley Flow-
Master’s Main Window when a project is currently open. Both methods of creating a
new project are explained here.

4.1.1 Creating a New Project From the Welcome Dialog Box

To create a new project from the Welcome dialog box:

1. If Bentley FlowMaster is not open, start Bentley FlowMaster, then, in the

Welcome dialog box, click the Create New Project button.

Note: You can click Help > Welcome Dialog to open the Welcome
dialog box if

2. The Main Window opens to a new, untitled project.

– To name the project, click File > Save As. In the Save As dialog box, enter
the filename you want to use; then click Save.
– To setup the Project Properties, click Project > Properties, then enter your
data into the Project Properties dialog box.
– To set up the units for the project, click Project > FlexUnits, then make any
changes.

4.1.2 Creating a New Project from the Main Window

You can create a new project from Bentley FlowMaster’s Main Window by using the
menus or the toolbar:

1. To create a new project from the Bentley FlowMaster menu, in the Main Window,
click File > New > Project (Ctrl+N).
Alternatively, to create a new project from the Bentley Flow-
Master toolbar, in the Main Window, click the New button’s
down arrow and select Project.
2. The Main Window opens to a new, untitled project.
– To name the project, click File > Save As. In the Save As dialog box, enter
the filename you want to use; then click Save.

4-118 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 How Do I…

– To setup the Project Properties, click Project > Properties, then enter your
data into the Project Properties dialog box.
– To set up the units for the project, click Project > FlexUnits, then make any
changes.

Note: Any project that was already open when you created the New
Project is still open. Both the old and new project display in the
Project Explorer window.

4.2 Open an Existing Project

When you first start Bentley FlowMaster, the welcome dialog box opens, which lets
you open an existing project. You can also open an existing project from Bentley
FlowMaster’s Main Window when another project is currently open.

1. Use one of the following methods to open an existing project:

– In the Welcome dialog box, click the Open Existing Project button.
– In the Bentley FlowMaster menu, click File > Open (Ctrl+O).
– In the Bentley FlowMaster toolbar, click the Open button.

2. In the Select Project to Open dialog box, browse to the directory where your
project is saved.
3. Click the project to highlight it, then click the Open button.

4.3 Create a New Worksheet?

When you first start Bentley FlowMaster, the welcome dialog box opens, which lets
you create a new worksheet. You can also create a new worksheet from Bentley Flow-
Master’s Main Window when a project is currently open, and from the Project
Explorer window.

1. Use one of the following methods to create a new worksheet:

– In the Welcome dialog box, click Create Worksheet.
– In the Bentley FlowMaster menu, click File > New > Worksheet (Ctrl+W).
– In the Bentley FlowMaster toolbar, click the New button’s
down arrow and select Worksheet.
– In the Project Explorer, right-click an existing project, then
select Add > New Worksheet.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-119

Name a Worksheet

2. In the Create New Worksheet dialog box:

a. In the Categories pane, click the element group from which you want to create
your worksheet.
b. In the Worksheets pane, click the worksheet you want to use.
3. Click OK.

4.4 Name a Worksheet

When you create a new worksheet, it is assigned an automatically generated name that
comprises the worksheet type followed by a number (the number is incremental).

1. Use one of the following methods to rename a worksheet:

– In the Project Explorer window, click once on the worksheet label (to the right
of the worksheet icon), to highlight it, then click the highlighted label again
and the label becomes editable.
– Right-click on the worksheet whose name you wish to change and select
Rename from the shortcut menu.

2. Type the name of the worksheet and press Enter.

4.5 Edit a Worksheet

Each worksheet dialog box comprises multiple tabs, and is divided along the center
into two sections. The section on the left is for input, and the section on the right is
output, or results.

To edit a worksheet, open it by double-clicking it in the Project Explorer. Then you

can:

• Enter input data.

• Change the variable you are solving for by clicking the Solve For drop-down list
and making a selection.
• Choose the friction method to use in the calculations (available in some worksheet
types). Certain input and output variables are enabled and disabled depending on
the friction method you choose.
• Set or edit the roughness coefficient by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button next to
the Roughness Coefficient field. Then, choose a predefined roughness coefficient
based on the material used.

4-120 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 How Do I…

• Right-click any units to set the Units and Formatting options for any field.
• Move from field to field by clicking on the field with the mouse or pressing Tab or
Shift+Tab.

4.6 Create a Rating Table

A rating table shows how one or more (dependent) attributes change as another (inde-
pendent) attribute is changed. For example, for a series of depths in a channel, you can
show what the flow and velocity are. You might use rating tables to evaluate and show
the performance of a design over a range of conditions that it might experience.

You can create a rating table for every worksheet. The left side of the rating table
corresponds with the input fields on the left side of the worksheet, while the right side
of the rating table ranges of values for the fields on the left half of the rating table.

To create a rating table:

1. Open the worksheet on which you want to base the rating table, and enter your
data into it.
2. Click Solve to calculate the worksheet.
3. Click the worksheet dialog box for which you want to create the rating
table.
4. Click Analysis > Rating Table or click the Rating Table
button. The Rating Table Setup dialog box opens.
5. In the Rating Table Setup dialog box, choose the attributes you want solved—you
can select multiple attributes.
6. Enter the Minimum, Maximum, and Increment values.
7. Click OK. The Rating Table dialog box opens and displays the rating table. You
can:
– Click Define Rating Table to change the setup for the table.
– Click Print Preview to see how the table will look when printed.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-121

Plot Rating Curves

4.7 Plot Rating Curves

A rating curve shows how one or more (dependent) attributes change as another (inde-
pendent) attribute is changed. For example, for a series of depths in a channel, you can
show what the flow and velocity are. You might use rating curves (also called perfor-
mance curves) to evaluate and show the performance of a design over a range of
conditions that it might experience.

You can plot one or more rating curves as graphs for each worksheet. You can plot
either a single curve or a family of curves.

To plot one or more rating curves:

1. Open the worksheet on which you want to base the rating table, and enter your
data into it.
2. Click Solve to calculate the worksheet.
3. Click the worksheet dialog box for which you want to plot rating curves.
4. Click Analysis > Rating Curve or click the Rating Curve
button. The Rating Curve Setup dialog box opens.
5. Choose the attribute to plot from the Plot and Vs. menus.
The Plot attribute is the variable for the Y axis. The Vs. attribute is the variable for
the X axis.
6. Enter the Minimum, Maximum, and Increment data for the Vs. attribute.
7. To plot a family of curves, select the Varying check box.
Note that the attribute drop-down list and the associated Minimum, Maximum,
and Increment fields become active. Select from the list and enter your data in the
fields.
8. Click OK. The Rating Curve dialog box opens and displays the rating table. You
can:
– Click Define Rating Curve to change the setup for the table.
– Click Print Preview to see how the curves will look when printed.
– Click Chart Options to change the formatting and layout of the graphs. (For
more information, see “Tutorial 3—Results Reporting” on page 2-15.)

4-122 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 How Do I…

4.8 Plot a Cross Section

You can plot a cross-sectional diagram for each worksheet.

1. Open the worksheet on which you want to base the cross section, and enter your
data into it.
2. Click Solve to calculate the worksheet.
3. Click the worksheet dialog box for which you want to plot the cross
section.
4. Click Analysis > Cross Section or click the Cross Section
button. The Cross Section Setup dialog box opens.
5. If you want to change the aspect ratio of the diagram, select the Manual Scale
check box, then enter a value in the Aspect Ratio field.
6. If you want, enter a title for the cross section in the Report Title field.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK. The Cross Section dialog box opens and displays the rating table. You
can:
– Click Print Preview to see how the cross section will look when printed.
– Click Options to open the Cross Section Setup dialog box, so you can change
the Manual Scale value or Report Title.

4.9 Print a Report

Bentley FlowMaster lets you print a variety of reports. From the main view, you can
print detailed reports and tabular reports for each worksheet.

The detailed report contains all input data and results, along with all project informa-
tion present in the Project Properties dialog box.

To print a detailed report:

1. Open the worksheet for which you want to print a report, and enter your data into
it.
2. Click Solve to calculate the worksheet.
3. Click the worksheet dialog box for which you want to print a report.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-123

Customize a Tabular Report

4. Click Analysis > Detailed Report. This opens the Generic Report Setup dialog
box, which lets you enter a name for the report. After you enter a name for the
report and click OK, the Print Preview dialog box opens with the report displayed
as it will be printed to the currently selected default printer.
5. In the Print Preview dialog box, click the Print button, select your printer, and
click OK to print the report.

4.10 Customize a Tabular Report

There are several ways to customize a tabular report:

• Change the report title—When you print a table, the table name is used as the
title for the printed report. To change the title that appears on your printed report:
a. Click the Options button in the Tabular Report dialog box.
b. Type a new report title in the Report Title dialog box, then click OK. The new
title will appear on the report the next time you click the Report button in the
Tabular Report dialog box.
• Add and remove columns—You can add, remove, and change the order of
columns from the Tabular Report dialog box by clicking the Edit button. The Edit
button displays the Tabular Report Setup dialog box, which lets you select which
columns to include in the table. For more information, see “Tabular Report Setup
Dialog Box” on page 3-109.
• Move columns—You can drag and drop columns in a tabular report to change the
order or columns. Select the column heading of the column that you would like to
move, then use the mouse drag the column to its new location. A vertical separator
line appears betweeen columns to indicate the selected column’s new location
before you release the mouse button.
• Resize columns—You can change the width of any column in a tabular report.
Click the vertical separator line between column headings. Notice that the cursor
changes shape to indicate that you can resize the column. Drag the column sepa-
rator to the left or right to stretch the column to its new size.
• Change column headings—Right-click the column heading that you wish to
change and select Edit Column Label. Type the new column heading in the Edit
Column Label dialog box, then click OK.
• Copy data—You can copy the contents of the selected table cell, rows, and/or
columns to the Windows clipboard, then paste the data into another application,
such as Notepad or Microsoft Excel. Just select the cells, rows, or columns you
want to copy, then click the Copy button.

4-124 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 How Do I…

• Sort the contents of a table column—You can sort the contents of a table column
by right-clicking the column heading and selecting one of the Sort commands. For
more information, “Sort the Contents of a Column in a Tabular Report” on
page 4-125.
• Filter the contents of a table—You can set up create custom filters to display
only certain data in the table by right-clicking a column heading and selecting one
of the Filter commands. For more information, “Filter the Contents of a Tabular
Report” on page 4-126.

4.10.1 Sort the Contents of a Column in a Tabular Report

To sort the contents of a column in a tabular report:

1. Open the tabular report you want to work with.

2. Right-click the heading of the column you want to sort, then select Sort.
3. Select the sorting method you want to use:
– Sort Ascending—Sorts alphabetically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts
numerically from negative to positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected
check boxes to the top and cleared ones to the bottom.
– Sort Descending—Sorts alphabetically from Z to A, from top to bottom.
Sorts numerically from positive to negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared
check boxes to the top and selected ones to the bottom.
– Custom—Specify one or more attributes by which to sort the contents of the
selected column.
4. For a custom sort, specify the attribute(s) by which to sort the selected column in
the Custom Sort dialog box. The Custom Sort dialog box contains a table in which
you define one or more sort keys. A sort key contains two parts:
– Attribute—The attribute to sort. You can select any field in the tabular report
from a drop-down list.
– Sort Order—The order in which to sort the selected attribute’s values. Select
Ascending or Descending.
Enter one or more sort keys.

5. Click OK.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-125

Customize a Tabular Report

4.10.2 Filter the Contents of a Tabular Report

To filter the contents of a tabular report:

1. Open the tabular report you want to filter.

2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, then select Filter.
3. Then, select the filter method you want to use:
– Quick Filter—Set up a simple filter by right-clicking the column header for
the attribute by which you wish to filter and selecting Filter > Quick Filter.
– Custom Filter—Set up a custom filter based on one or more criteria.
– Reset—Turn off the active filter, causing all available rows in the table to be
displayed.
4. For Quick Filter or Custom Filter, specify your filtering criteria in the Filter dialog
box. Each filter criterion is made up of three items:
– Column—The attribute used to filter.
– Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the
data in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >, Contains,
and Begins With).

Note: The filtering options Contains and Begins With allow more
flexibility with regard to filtering tables. These filters are only
available for column types that have alphabetic values, for
example Label.

The Contains filter checks for the specified value anywhere in

the words, and the Begins With filter checks only the first letter
for the specified value.

– Value—The comparison value.

You can add any number of criteria to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are
implicitly joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria
are defined, only rows that meet all of the specified criteria are displayed. A
filter remains active for the associated table until the filter is reset.

5. Click OK.

4-126 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 How Do I…

4.11 Set Field Options (Unit, Precision, Format)

Use the Set Field Options dialog box to change the units, display precision, and format
used for each attribute in Bentley FlowMaster. You can mix SI (metric) and Imperial
unit systems within the same worksheet.

To open the Set Field Options dialog box:

1. Right-click the unit label next to the data field for the input or output variable to
be changed.
2. Click the Units and Formatting.
3. In the Set Field Options dialog box that appears, change the units, precision, and
formatting. For more information, see “Set Field Options Dialog Box” on page 3-
112.

4.12 Save a Project

You can save a project as follows:

• To save the current project without changing the name of the project or its path,
you can click File > Save or, in the Project Explorer, right-click the project to be
saved and select Save from the shortcut menu.
• To save and change the name of the project and/or its path, you can click File >
Save As or, in the Project Explorer, right-click the project to be saved and select
Save As from the shortcut menu.
• To save all currently open projects, click File > Save All.

4.13 Exit Bentley FlowMaster

To exit Bentley FlowMaster, click File > Exit. If there are unsaved changes, a
message will prompt you to save before exiting.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 4-127

Exit Bentley FlowMaster

4-128 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

Bentley FlowMaster 5
Theory

Bentley FlowMaster and its calculations are based on the principles outlined in this
section:

• “Uniform Flow” on page 5-129

• “Critical Flow” on page 5-134
• “Gradually Varied Flow Analysis” on page 5-146
• “Weir Flow” on page 5-153
• “Orifice Flow” on page 5-161
• “Pressure Pipe” on page 5-162
• “Inlet Hydraulics” on page 5-163

5.1 Uniform Flow

The equations used in Bentley FlowMaster deal primarily with uniform flow. Uniform
flow refers to a hydraulic condition in which the flow depth, channel discharge, and
flow area do not change over a channel reach having constant section characteristics
such as shape and material. These conditions are met only when the channel bottom
slope and the friction slope are equal. When water is flowing under uniform flow
conditions, the depth of flow is frequently called normal depth.

Uniform flow can be described by the generalized friction equation:

(5.1)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-129

Uniform Flow

Where V = Mean velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)

C = Flow resistance factor
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
x, y = Exponents

The material lining the flow channel usually determines the flow resistance or rough-
ness factor, C. However, the ultimate value of the C component may be a function of
the channel shape, depth, and velocity of flow. The hydraulic radius, R, is a strict func-
tion of the channel shape. For every geometric shape, R can be readily calculated by
dividing the cross-sectional flow area by the wetted perimeter, once a depth is known
or assumed. The energy slope, S, is constant under the uniform flow assumption.

Since average velocity is constant under uniform flow (constant discharge and area
conditions), combining equation 5.1 with the continuity equation:

Q = VA (5.2)

results in the equation:

Q = ACRxSy (5.3)

Where Q = Discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

A = Cross-sectional flow area (m3, ft3 )

This solution yields a complete solution for the rate of flow.

Note: Hydraulic radius is related to flow area, so further reduction of

this equation for specific geometries is often possible.

Bentley FlowMaster offers the four variations of the general uniform flow equation
listed below. These equations differ from each other by the computation and nature of
C and in the values assigned to x and y.

• “Manning’s Formula”
• “Kutter’s Formula”
• “Hazen-Williams Formula”
• “Darcy-Weisbach Formula”

5-130 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.1.1 Manning’s Formula

Manning’s formula is probably the most widely used open channel flow equation, and
is one of the easiest equations to solve. The roughness component, C, is constant over
the full range of flows and is typically represented by Manning’s n. The values of x
and y are 2/3 and 1/2, respectively. Equations for U.S. customary and the S.I. system
units are shown below.

S.I. Units (5.4)

U.S. Customary Units (5.5)

Where V = Mean velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)

n = Manning’s coefficient
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

5.1.2 Kutter’s Formula

The standard form of Kutter’s Formula is known as the Chézy Formula. Kutter’s
Formula is widely used in sanitary sewer design and analysis. The roughness compo-
nent, C, is variable and is a function of R, S, and the channel material. Both x and y are
equal to 1/2.

Equations for U.S. customary units and the S.I. system are shown below:

(5.6)

The roughness coefficient C is related to Manning’s n through Kutter’s formula.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-131

Uniform Flow

Note: Kutter’s roughness coefficients are the same as Manning’s

roughness coefficients.

(5.7)

Where C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/

sec.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
R = Hydraulic radius (m,ft)
n = Kutter’s roughness (unitless)
k1 = Constant (23.0 SI, 41.65 U.S. customary)

k2 = Constant (0.00155 SI, 0.00281 U.S. customary)

k3 = Constant (1.0 SI, 1.811 U.S. customary)

5.1.3 Hazen-Williams Formula

The Hazen-Williams Formula is most frequently used in the design of pressure pipe
systems for water distribution. The roughness coefficient, C, is constant over the full
range of flows (assumed turbulent). The values of x and y in this empirical equation
are 0.63 and 0.54. Equations for U.S. customary and the S.I. units are shown below.

S.I. Units (5.8)

U.S. Customary Units (5.9)

5-132 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.1.4 Darcy-Weisbach Formula

The Darcy-Weisbach Formula was developed for use in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems. However, the formula is sufficiently general so that it can be applied readily
to open channel flow systems. In fact, the ASCE Task Force on Friction Factors in
Open Channels (1963) supported the use of the Darcy-Weisbach formula for free-
surface flows.

This recommendation has not been widely accepted since the solution to the equation
is difficult, and not readily computed by simple desktop methods. With the computer-
ization of this method, the Darcy-Weisbach Formula will likely gain greater accep-
tance, since it successfully models the variability of effective channel roughness with
channel material, geometry, and velocity. Thus, many engineers view this formula as
the most accurate method for modeling uniform flow.

The roughness component in the Darcy-Weisbach equation is a function of both the

channel material and the Reynolds Number, which varies with V and R. Like Kutter’s
Equation, both x and y are equal to 1/2. The familiar form of the equation, which is
applicable to circular pipes with full flow only, is:

(5.10)

Where hf = Headloss (m, ft)

f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor

D = Pipe diameter (m, ft)
L = Pipe length (m, ft)
V = Flow velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

This equation is adapted for channel geometries other than full circular by the relation:

D = 4R (5.11)

and then rearranged to the form:

(5.12)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-133

Critical Flow

The Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (f) can be found using the Colebrook equation for
fully developed turbulent flow. Roughness height, k, is a physical property of the
channel material. Equations for free surface and full flow closed conduits are shown
below.

Free Surface (5.13)

Full-Flow Closed Conduits (5.14)

Where Re = Reynold’s number (unitless)

k = Roughness height (m, ft)

5.2 Critical Flow

Critical flow conditions occur when, for a given discharge, the specific energy of flow
is at a minimum. The specific energy, E, in Bentley FlowMaster is computed using the
equation:

(5.15)

Where y = Flow depth (m, ft)

V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

The quantity V2/2g is also known as the velocity head. The specific energy equation
used in Bentley FlowMaster is valid only for small slopes (< 10%). It also neglects the
effects of the velocity variation across the flow section; that is, the velocity coeffi-
cient, a, is assumed to equal 1.0.

At critical depth, the velocity of flow is also equal to the wave celerity (i.e. the speed
at which waves will ripple outward from a pebble which is tossed into the water). The
Froude number, F, is defined as the ratio of actual velocity to wave celerity. This
number is only defined for sections that have a free surface; it is undefined for closed
conduits or closed top irregular channels when flowing full.

5-134 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

The ratio is:

(5.16)

Where D = Hydraulic depth of channel is equivalent to A/T

(m, ft)
A = Flow area (m2, ft2)
T = Top width of flow (m, ft)

When F is less than one, the flow is said to be subcritical (velocity slower than wave
celerity). When F is greater than one, the flow is said to be supercritical (velocity
faster than wave celerity). When F is equal to one, the flow is said to be critical. A
diagram showing these flow ranges appears below.

Figure 5-1: Specific Energy Curve

The requirement that wave celerity equals actual velocity at critical flow conditions
means that critical depth can be computed by varying depth of flow until F equals 1.0.
Specifically, Bentley FlowMaster uses the following function, and solves by iterating
over depth until f (y) = 0:

(5.17)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-135

Critical Flow

5.2.1 Basic Concepts of Critical Flow

This section is intended to familiarize you with some of the methods used in this
program’s calculations. However, the text does not go into great detail on common
hydraulic terms and equations, such as determination of wetted perimeter, hydraulic
radius, hydraulic depth, and Reynolds number.

5.2.2 Hydraulic and Energy Grades

Bentley FlowMaster considers the following hydraulic and energy grade principles:

• “The Energy Principle” on page 5-136

• “The Energy Equation” on page 5-137
• “Hydraulic Grade” on page 5-138
• “Energy Grade” on page 5-138
• “HGL Convergence Test” on page 5-138

The Energy Principle

The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.

The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disre-
garded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.

In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,

resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:

Pressure head: p/ (5.18)

Elevation head: z (5.19)

Velocity head: V2/2g (5.20)

5-136 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2 )

 = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3 )
z = Elevation (m, ft)
V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)

These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two loca-
tions using the energy equation.

The Energy Equation

In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respec-
tively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, we then obtain the energy
equation:

(5.21)

Where p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2 )

 = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3 )
z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft)
V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)
hp = Head gain from pump (m, ft)

HL = Combined headloss (m, ft)

The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quanti-
ties, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-137

Critical Flow

Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.

Energy Grade

The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head ( V2/2g ).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.

Figure 5-2: Plot of EGL and HGL

HGL Convergence Test

In full network calculation this value is taken as the maximum absolute change
between two successive solves of hydraulic grade at any junction or inlet in the
system. This test is used to optimize the performance of system solutions. It mini-
mizes the number and extent of hydraulic grade line computations in the upstream
direction. For a given discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through pipes
will continue until two successive calculations change by an absolute difference of
less than this test value.

5-138 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

The HGL Convergence Test value is also used in the standard step gradually varied
flow profiling algorithm. If two successive depth iterations are within this absolute
test value, the step is solved.

5.2.3 Friction Loss Methods

There are many equations that approximate friction losses associated with the flow of
liquid through a given section. Commonly used friction methods include:

• “Chézy’s Equation”
• “Kutter’s Equation”
• “Manning’s Equation”
• “Darcy-Weisbach Equation”
• “Swamee and Jain Equation”
• “Colebrook-White Equation”
• “Hazen-Williams Equation”

Friction losses are generally based on the relationships between fluid velocity, section
roughness, depth of flow, and the friction slope (headloss per unit length of conduit).

Chézy’s Equation
Chézy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Manning’s equation and Kutter’s equation. Chézy’s equation is:

(5.22)

Where Q = Discharge in the section (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/
sec.)
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-139

Critical Flow

Kutter’s Equation
Kutter’s equation can be used to determine the roughness coefficient in Chézy’s
formula, and is most commonly used for sanitary sewer analysis. Kutter’s equation is
as follows:

Note: Kutter’s roughness coefficients are the same as Manning’s

roughness coefficients.

(5.23)

Where C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/

sec.)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
R = Hydraulic roughness (unitless)
n = Kutter’s roughness (unitless)
k1 = Constant (23.0 SI, 41.65 U.S. customary)

k2 = Constant (0.00155 SI, 0.00281 U.S. customary)

k3 = Constant (1.0 SI, 1.811 U.S. customary)

Manning’s Equation
Manning's equation is one of the most popular methods in use today for free surface
flow (and, like Kutter’s equation, is based on Chézy’s equation). For Manning’s equa-
tion, the roughness coefficient in Chézy’s equation is calculated as:

(5.24)

5-140 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/

sec.)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
n = Manning’s roughness (sec./m1/3 )
k = Constant (1.00m1/3/m1/3 SI, 1.49 ft1/3/ft1/3 U.S.
customary)

Substituting this roughness into Chézy’s equation, we obtain the well-known

Manning’s equation:

Note: Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the

roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.

(5.25)

Where Q = Discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

k = Constant (1.00m1/3/m1/3 SI, 1.49ft1/3/ft1/3 U.S.
customary)
n = Manning’s coefficient (unitless)
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:

(5.26)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-141

Critical Flow

Where hf = Headloss (m, ft)

f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

D = Pipe diameter (m, ft)
L = Pipe length (m, ft)
V = Flow velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular section’s full flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:

(5.27)

Where A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )

T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

This can then be rearranged to the form:

(5.28)

Where Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

5-142 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor.

Swamee and Jain Equation

Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Bentley Systems.

The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is depen-
dent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

(5.29)

Where f = Friction factor (unitless)

k = Roughness height (m, ft)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft)
Re = Reynolds number (unitless)

Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction Factor:

Free Surface (5.30)

Full Flow (Closed Conduit) (5.31)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-143

Critical Flow

Where Re = Reynolds number (unitless)

k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft)

f = Friction factor (unitless)
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)

Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:

(5.32)

Where Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
k = Constant (0.85 SI, 1.32 U.S. customary)

5.2.4 Flow Regime

Note: Based on the gradually varied flow analysis, different portions of

any given pipe may be under different flow regimes.

The hydraulic grade in a flow section depends heavily on the tailwater conditions,
pipe slope, discharge, and other conditions. The basic flow regimes that a pipe may
experience include:

• “Pressure Flow”
• “Uniform Flow and Normal Depth”
• “Critical Flow, Critical Depth, and Critical Slope”
• “Subcritical Flow”
• “Supercritical Flow”

5-144 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Pressure Flow
When a pipe is surcharged, headlosses are based on the full barrel area and wetted
perimeter. Because these characteristics are all functions of the section shape and size,
friction loss calculations are greatly simplified by pressurized conditions.

Uniform Flow and Normal Depth

Uniform flow refers to a hydraulic condition where the discharge and cross-sectional
area, and therefore the velocity, are constant throughout the length of the channel or
pipe. For a pipe flowing full, all that this requires is that the pipe be straight and have
no contractions or expansions. For a non-full section, however, there are a few addi-
tional points of interest:

• In order for the cross-sectional area to remain the same, the depth of flow must be
constant throughout the length of the channel. This requires that the friction slope
equal the constructed slope. This depth is called normal depth.
• Since the hydraulic grade line parallels the invert of the section and the velocity
does not change, the energy grade line is parallel to both the hydraulic grade line
and the section invert under uniform flow conditions.

In prismatic channels, flow conditions will typically approach normal depth if the
channel is sufficiently long.

Critical Flow, Critical Depth, and Critical Slope

Critical flow occurs when the specific energy of the section is at a minimum. This
condition is defined by the situation where:

(5.33)

Where A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )

T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

This is a relatively simple computation for simple geometric shapes, but can require
iterative calculation for more complex shapes (such as arches). Some sections may
even have several valid critical depths, making numerical convergence more difficult.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-145

Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

Critical depth refers to the depth of water in a channel for which the specific energy is
at its minimum.

Critical slope refers to the slope at which the critical depth of a pipe would be equal to
the normal depth.

Subcritical Flow

Subcritical flow refers to any flow condition where the Froude number is less than 1.0.
For this condition, the depth is above critical depth, and the velocity is below the crit-
ical depth velocity.

Supercritical Flow

Supercritical flow refers to any condition where the Froude number, or the ratio of
internal forces to gravity forces, is greater than 1.0. For this condition, the depth is
below critical depth, and the velocity is above the critical depth velocity.

5.3 Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

For free surface flow, depth rarely remains the same throughout the length of a
channel or pipe. Starting from a boundary control depth, the depth changes gradually,
increasing or decreasing until normal depth is achieved (if the conduit is sufficiently
long). The determination of a boundary control depth depends on both the tailwater
condition and the hydraulic characteristics of the conduit. The areas of classification
for gradually varied flow analysis are:

• Slope Classification
• Zone Classification
• Profile Classification

5.3.1 Slope Classification

The constructed slope of a conduit is a very important factor in determining the type
of gradually varied flow profile that exists. Slopes fall into one of three types, all of
which are handled by the program:

• Hydraulically Mild Slope

• Critical Slope
• Hydraulically Steep Slope

5-146 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Any pipe can qualify as only one of these slope types for a given discharge. For
differing flows, though, a pipe may change between qualifying as a mild, critical, and
steep slope. These slopes do not relate to just the constructed slope, but to the
constructed slope relative to the critical slope for the given discharge.

5.3.2 Hydraulically Steep Slope

A hydraulically steep slope is a condition where the constructed slope is greater than
the critical slope. For this condition, the section’s normal depth is below critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually supercritical. However, high tailwater conditions may
cause flow to be subcritical.

5.3.3 Critical Slope

A pipe or channel may have exactly the same slope as the critical slope for the
discharge it carries. This is a very uncommon occurrence, but it is possible and the
program does calculate it appropriately. Critical depth is an inherently unstable
surface, so flow is most likely to be subcritical for these slopes.

5.3.4 Hydraulically Mild Slope

A hydraulically mild slope is a condition where the constructed slope is less than the
critical slope. For this condition, the section’s normal depth is above critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually subcritical.

5.3.5 Zone Classification

There are three zones that are typically used to classify gradually varied flow:

• Zone 1 is where actual flow depth is above both normal depth and critical depth.
• Zone 2 is where actual flow depth is between normal depth and critical depth.
• Zone 3 is where actual flow depth is below both normal depth and critical depth.

5.3.6 Profile Classification

The gradually varied flow profile classification is a combination of the slope classifi-
cation and the zone classification. For example, a pipe with a hydraulically mild slope
and flow in zone 1 would be considered a mild-1 profile (M1 for short). The program
will analyze most profile types, but will not analyze certain flow profile types that
occur rarely in conventional sewer system such as H3, M3, and S3.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-147

Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

The following diagrams describe the various profile classifications.

5-148 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Figure 5-3: Profile Classification

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-149

Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

5.3.7 Energy Balance

Even for gradually varied flow, the solution is still a matter of balancing the energy
between the two ends of a pipe segment. The energy equation as it relates to each end
of a segment is as follows (note that the pressures for both ends are zero, since it is
free surface flow):

(5.34)

Where Z1 = Hydraulic grade at upstream end of segment (m,

ft)
V1 = Velocity at upstream end (m/sec., ft/sec.)

Z2 = Hydraulic grade at downstream end of segment

(m, ft)
V2 = Velocity at downstream end (m/sec., ft/sec.)

HL = Loss due to friction—other losses assumed to be

zero (m, ft)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

The friction loss is computed based on the average rate of friction loss along the
segment and the length of the segment. This relationship is as follows:

(5.35)

Where HL = Loss across segment (m, ft)

SAVG = Average friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

S1 = Friction slope at upstream end of segment (m/m,

ft/ft)
S2 = Friction slope at downstream end of segment (m/
m, ft/ft)
x = Length of segment being analyzed (m, ft)

5-150 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

The conditions at one end of the segment are known through assumption or from a
previous calculation step. Since the friction slope is a function of velocity, which is a
function of depth, the depth at the other end of the segment can be found through iter-
ation. There are two primary methods for this iterative solution, the Standard Step
method and the Direct Step method.

Standard Step Method

The standard step method of gradually varied flow energy balance involves dividing
the channel into segments of known length and solving for the unknown depth at one
end of the segment, starting with a known or assumed depth at the other end. The stan-
dard step method is the most popular method of determining the flow profile because
it can be applied to any channel, not just prismatic channels.

Direct Step Method

The direct step method is based on the same basic energy principles as the standard
step method, but takes a slightly different approach towards the solution. Instead of
assuming a segment length and solving for the depth at the end of the segment, the
direct step method assumes a depth and then solves for the segment length.

5.3.8 Mixed Flow Profiles

Although the hydraulic slope of a pipe will be the same throughout its length, a pipe
may contain several different profile types. The transitions that may be encountered
include:

• “Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions”

• “Rapidly Varied Flow”

Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions

There may be conditions such that part of the section is flowing full, while part of the
flow remains open. These conditions are called sealing conditions, and the sections
are analyzed in separate parts. For sealing conditions, the portion of the section
flowing full is analyzed as pressure flow, and the remaining portion is analyzed with
gradually varied flow techniques.

Rapidly Varied Flow

Rapidly varied flow is turbulent flow resulting from the abrupt and pronounced curva-
ture of flow streamlines into or out of a hydraulic control structure. Examples of
rapidly varied flow include hydraulic jumps, bends, and bridge contractions.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-151

Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

The hydraulic phenomenon that occurs when the flow passes rapidly from supercrit-
ical to subcritical flow is called a hydraulic jump. The most common occurrence of
this within a gravity flow network occurs when there is a steep pipe discharging into a
particularly high tailwater, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-4: Hydraulic Jump

There are significant losses associated with hydraulic jumps, due to the amount of
mixing and hydraulic turbulence that occurs. These forces are also highly erosive, so
engineers typically try to prevent jumps from occurring in gravity flow systems, or at
least try to predict the location of these jumps in order to provide adequate channel,
pipe, or structure protection. The program does not perform any specific force anal-
yses that seek to precisely locate the hydraulic jump, nor does it identify the occur-
rence of jumps that might happen as flows leave a steep pipe and enter a mild pipe.
Rather it performs analyses sufficient to compute grades at structures.

5.3.9 Backwater Analysis

The classic solution of gravity flow hydraulics is via a backwater analysis. This type
of analysis starts at the network outlet under free discharge, submerged, or tailwater
control, and proceeds in an upstream direction.

Steep pipes tend to interrupt the backwater analysis, and reset the hydraulic control to
critical depth at the upstream end of the steep pipe. A frontwater analysis may be
needed for a steep profile (such as an S2), with the backwater analysis recommencing
from the upstream structure.

Certain situations are considered to be invalid downstream control by Bentley Flow-

Master. The following criteria must be met to enable a valid downstream control:

Note: An error message will be displayed if the input data does not
satisfy these requirements.

• Mild Case: Normal Depth Greater Than Or Equal To Critical Depth

• Steep Case: Critical Depth Greater Than Or Equal To Normal Depth
• Critical Slope: Critical Depth Equal To Normal Depth

5-152 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.3.10 Frontwater Analysis

The program will perform a frontwater analysis in a steep pipe operating under super-
critical flow, since these pipes are typically entrance controlled. The hydraulic control
is at the upstream end of the conduit, and the gradually varied flow analysis will
proceed in a downstream direction until either the normal depth is achieved, a
hydraulic jump occurs, or the end of the pipe is encountered.

Note: The program’s algorithm is fundamentally based on backwater

analysis. As a result, a continuous frontwater analysis is not
performed through two or more consecutive steep pipes. This is
a performance trade-off that has little impact in evaluating
performance of the collection system in most situations. The
assumption of critical depth at the upstream end results in a
conservative depth in all cases, and is exactly correct at the
point of the steep run furthest upstream.

Certain situations are considered to be invalid upstream control by Bentley Flow-

[Link] following criteria must be met to enable a valid downstream control:

• Mild Case: Depth Less Than Or Equal To Normal Depth

• Steep Case: Normal Depth Greater Than Or Equal To Critical Depth
• Critical Slope: Critical Depth Equal To Normal Depth

5.4 Weir Flow

Sharp-crested and non-sharp-crested weirs are the two profiles generally associated
with weir flow. Sharp-crested weirs are usually used for measuring a discharge, based
on the water height. Non-sharp-crested weirs are usually part of a hydraulic structure,
such as an overflowing embankment or roadway.

5.4.1 Sharp-Crested Weirs

A sharp-crested weir has a sharp upstream edge formed so that the water flows clear
of the crest. Bentley FlowMaster handles weir calculations for unsubmerged (free
discharge) and submerged (backwater effect) sharp-crested weirs.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-153

Weir Flow

Rectangular Sharp-Crested Weir

Note: An error message will be displayed if the input data does not
satisfy these requirements.

Figure 5-5: Rectangular Sharp-Crested Weir

The discharge over an unsubmerged rectangular sharp-crested weir is defined as:

(5.36)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Weir coefficient (typical values for this kind of
weir are C = 1.84 SI and C = 3.33 U.S. customary)
L = Weir opening width (m, ft)
i = Number of contractions (i = 0, 1, or 2)
H = Head above bottom of opening (m, ft)

i = 0 corresponds to the case of a suppressed rectangular weir, for which the channel
width is equal to the weir opening length, and yields the equation:

(5.37)

i = 2 corresponds to the case of a contracted rectangular weir.

5-154 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

V-Notch Sharp-Crested Weir

Figure 5-6: V-Notch Sharp Crested Weir

The discharge over an unsubmerged V-Notch sharp-crested weir is defined as:

(5.38)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Coefficient of discharge (C = 0.58 typically used
for a 90° V-notch weir)
 = Angle of notch (degrees)
H = Head above bottom of notch (m, ft)

Table 5-1: V-Notch Weir Coefficient of Discharge

Head Weir Angle (degrees)

(feet)
22.5 30 45 60 90 120

0.5 .611 .605 .596 .590 .584 .581

1.0 .593 .590 .583 .580 .576 .575

1.5 .586 .583 .578 .575 .572 .672

2.0 .583 .580 .576 .573 .571 .571

2.5 .580 .578 .574 .572 .570 .570

3.0 .579 .577 .574 .571 .570 .570

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-155

Weir Flow

Coefficients for sharp-crested V-notched weirs vary with the angle of the notch and
with head depth. For detailed discussion on discharge coefficients for various weir
configurations, review the references noted at the bottom of this page. 1 2 3

Cipolletti Sharp-Crested Weir

Figure 5-7: Cipoletti Sharp-Crested Weir

Cipolletti weirs are trapezoidal with 1:4 slopes to compensate for end contraction
losses. The equation generally accepted for computing the discharge through an
unsubmerged sharp-crested Cipolletti weir with complete contraction is:

Note: 1.84 and 3.367 are standard values only.

S.I. Units (5.39)

U.S. Customary Units (5.40)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

L = Bottom of notch width
H = Head above bottom of opening (m, ft)

1. Brater, Ernest F. and Horace Williams King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
New York, 1976.
2. Shen, John, Discharge Characteristics of Triangular Notch Thin-Plate Weirs, Geological Survey
Water-Supply Paper 1617-B, U.S Dept. of Interior, 1981.
3. Derived from table in: Van Haveren, Bruce P., Water Resource Measurements, American Water
Works Assoc.,1986.

5-156 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Submerged Sharp-Crested Weir

Figure 5-8: Submerged Sharp-Crested Weir

If the sharp-crested weir is submerged as illustrated in the figure above (with H2 > 0),
then the flow Q1 that would be obtained without submergence, using one of the equa-
tions above, is corrected as follows to obtain the flow Q over the weir1:

(5.41)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Q1 = Discharge over weir opening that would be
obtained without submergence at head H1 (m3/
sec., ft3/sec.)
H1 = Head above weir crest (m, ft)

H2 = Downstream head above weir (m, ft)

n = Exponent in corresponding weir equation with no

submergence (3/2 or 5/2 in cases above)

1. Brater, Ernest F. and Horace Williams King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
New York, 1976.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-157

Weir Flow

5.4.2 Non-Sharp-Crested Weirs

For the following types of weirs, the weir coefficients are strongly dependent on the
weir shape, width (measured in the flow direction) and the upstream head. It is recom-
mended to use values from a reference book as a starting point, and when possible,
calibrate these coefficients.

Broad-Crested Weir
A broad-crested weir has a crest that extends horizontally in the direction of flow far
enough to support the nappe (sheet of water flowing over the crest of the weir) so that
hydrostatic pressures are fully developed for at least some short distance.

In order to model Embankment or Roadway overtopping, the Federal Highway

Administration (FHWA) has developed a methodology that can be found in the
manual FHWA, HDS No. 5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985, which uses
the general broad-crested weir equation.

(5.42)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Cd = Weir coefficient

L = Length of roadway crest (m, ft)

Hr = Overtopping depth (m, ft)

Figure 5-9: Broad-Crested Weir

The overtopping discharge coefficient Cd is a function of the submergence using the

equation:

(5.43)

5-158 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

The variables Kt and Cr are defined in the following figures, reproduced from the
manual FHWA, HDS No.5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985. The first
two figures are used by Bentley FlowMaster to derive the base weir coefficient Cr
resulting from deep and shallow overtopping, respectively. The submergence correc-
tion Kt is determined implicitly using the third figure.

Figure 5-10: Discharge Coefficient Cr, for Hr/L > 0.15

Figure 5-11: Discharge Coefficient Cr, for Hr/L  0.15

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-159

Weir Flow

Figure 5-12: Submergence Factor, k

Triangular and Trapezoidal Weir

The discharge over a triangular or trapezoidal weir is:

(5.44)

Where Q = Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Weir coefficient
L = Weir length (m, ft)
H = Head above weir crest (m, ft)

Model these weirs by using the Generic Weir in Bentley FlowMaster, entering the
appropriate coefficient. The weir coefficient is a function of the upstream head and the
shape of the weir.

5-160 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.5 Orifice Flow

Figure 5-13: Orifice Flow (schematic)

The orifice equation is defined as:

(5.45)

Where Q = Flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Orifice coefficient
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )
H = Head (m, ft)

5.5.1 Orifice Coefficients

Although these coefficients vary with shape, size, and head depth, an average C coef-
ficient of 0.60 is often used for storm water orifice openings. A list of orifice coeffi-
cients for various heads and sizes of circular, square, rectangular, and triangular
shapes can be found in the Handbook of Hydraulics, by Brater et Al. (see References).

Sluice Gate
Gates have the hydraulic properties of orifices. Therefore, the discharge through a
sluice gate is:

(5.46)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-161

Pressure Pipe

Where Q = Flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Orifice coefficient
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )
H = Head (m, ft)

Model a sluice gate by using the Generic Orifice in Bentley FlowMaster, entering the
appropriate coefficient.

5.6 Pressure Pipe

In hydraulic applications, energy is often converted into units of energy per unit
weight, resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a
better “feel” for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equiva-
lents, the user is expressing the state of the system in terms of head. The energy at any
point within a hydraulic system is often represented in three parts:

Pressure head: p/ (5.47)

Elevation head: z (5.48)

Velocity head: V2/2g (5.49)

Where p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2 )

 = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3 )
z = Elevation (m, ft)
V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)

Balancing the energy at the two ends of a pressure pipe, the energy equation can be
reduced to:

(5.50)

5-162 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where hL = Friction headloss (m, ft)

5.6.1 Hydraulic Grade and Energy Grade

The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.

The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g). This
is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL.

5.7 Inlet Hydraulics

Bentley FlowMaster considers the following inlet hydraulic principles:

• “HEC-22 Inlet Comparison” on page 5-164

• “Flows in Gutters on Grade” on page 5-164
• “Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade” on page 5-168
• “Inlet Analysis” on page 5-169
• “Grate Inlet on Grade” on page 5-171
• “Curb Inlet on Grade” on page 5-173
• “Slot Inlet on Grade” on page 5-175
• “Combination Inlet on Grade” on page 5-175
• “Grate Inlet in Sag” on page 5-176
• “Curb Inlet in Sag” on page 5-177
• “Slot Inlet in Sag” on page 5-180
• “Combination Inlet in Sag” on page 5-181

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-163

Inlet Hydraulics

5.7.1 HEC-22 Inlet Comparison

Note: Pavement drainage requires consideration of gutter flow and

inlet capacity. The design of these elements is dependent on
storm frequency and the allowable spread of storm water on the
pavement surface.

Bentley FlowMaster performs hydraulic computations for

analyzing or sizing one inlet at a time. For analyzing or
designing an entire storm sewer network, Bentley Systems
offers StormCAD, which also follows the HEC-22 methodology
for inlet computations.

The methodology used by Bentley FlowMaster to perform pavement drainage and

inlet computations is described in Chapter 4 of the HEC-22 manual: Urban Drainage
Design Manual, 1996. This chapter is included as “Pavement Drainage” on page 6-
183. Related charts can be found in “Engineer’s Reference” on page 8-307. Most of
the information presented in HEC-22 Chapter 4 was originally published in the 2nd
edition, August 2001 Pub No FHWA-NHI-01-021FHWA, and AASHTO’s Model
Drainage Manual, 1991.

This section presents an overview of the HEC-22 methodology used by Bentley Flow-
Master. For more information, refer to “Pavement Drainage” on page 6-183 or the
HEC-22 documentation.

5.7.2 Flows in Gutters on Grade

Flows in gutters on grade includes:

• “Uniform Gutter Cross Slope” on page 5-164

• “Composite Gutter Section” on page 5-166

Uniform Gutter Cross Slope

In the case of a uniform cross-slope (gutter slope Sw equal to pavement slope Sx), the
relationship between the gutter flow Q and the flow spread T is obtained by applying
the Manning’s equation, assuming normal flow:

(5.51)

5-164 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where Q = Flow rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Kc = 0.376 SI, 0.56 U.S. customary

n = Manning’s coefficient
Sx = Pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)

SL = Longitudinal pavement slope (m/m, ft/ft)

T = Width of flow—spread (m, ft)

Figure 5-14: Uniform Gutter Cross Slope

The flow depth along the curb is:

d = TSx (5.52)

Where d = Depth of flow at curb (m, ft)

The coefficient E, as well as the variables Qw and Qs, are introduced as:

Qw = E0Q (5.53)

Qs = Q – Qw = (1 – E0)Q (5.54)

E0 = 1 – (1 – Wg/T)2.67 (5.55)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-165

Inlet Hydraulics

Where Q = Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Qw = Frontal flow—portion of the flow over the grate
width (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 = Ratio of flow above the grate to total flow

Qs = Side flow—flow outside the grate width (m3/sec.,

ft3/sec.)
Wg = Grate width (m, ft)

Composite Gutter Section

Figure 5-15: Composite Gutter Section

In the case of a composite gutter section, the coefficient E0, as well as the variables Qw
and Qs, are defined as:

Qw = E 0 Q (5.56)

Qs = Q – Qw = (1 – E0)Q (5.57)

5-166 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where Q = Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Qw = Frontal flow—portion of the flow in the depressed
gutter (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 = Ratio of flow in the depressed gutter to total flow

Qs = Side flow—flow outside the depressed gutter (m3/

sec., ft3/sec.)

E0 can then be derived from Manning’s equation as:

(5.58)

Where Sw = Gutter cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)

W = Width of depressed gutter—or grate, if it is

smaller (m, ft)

The continuously depressed gutter is also sometimes defined by a gutter depression, a,

defined as:

SI Units (5.59)

U.S. Customary Units (5.60)

Where a = Gutter depression (mm, in)

Gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to the street cross-slope
projection. It is also identified as a continuously depressed gutter because the gutter is
depressed along its full length.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-167

Inlet Hydraulics

5.7.3 Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade

Figure 5-16: Ditch Cross Section

The discharge Q in a ditch or median section is expressed as:

(5.61)

Where Q = Discharge rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Kc = 1.0 SI, 1.486 U.S. customary

n = Manning’s coefficient
B = Ditch width (m, ft)
d = Water depth (m, ft)
z1, z2 = Ratio H:V for ditch side slopes (m/m, ft/ft)

SL = Ditch longitudinal slope (m/m, ft/ft)

The ratio E0 of frontal flow (over the grate) to total flow is:

(5.62)

Where W = Grate width (m, ft)

5-168 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.7.4 Inlet Analysis

Inlets are divided into 4 categories, as illustrated in the following figure:

Figure 5-17: Inlet Types

For details on each type of inlet, refer to the HEC-22 Manual, Chapter 4 (see “Pave-
ment Drainage” on page 6-183).

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-169

Inlet Hydraulics

Note: Do not confuse gutter depression and local depression:

The gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to

the pavement normal cross-slope named a on the figure below,
which shows a gutter and inlet cross section. It is also referred
to as a continuously depressed gutter.

The local depression is the depression at the location of the inlet

(a’ in the figure below). It does not exist in the gutter upstream or
downstream of the inlet. It is measured from the gutter slope.

Figure 5-18: Continuous Gutter Depression and Local Depression

Figure 6.6 illustrates the concept of local depression versus gutter depression used by
HEC-22, with:

atotal = a + a' (5.63)

Where a = Gutter depression (mm, in)

a' = Local depression (mm, in)
atotal = Total depression at location of inlet (mm, in)

Inlets on Grade
Inlets located on a grade (SL > 0) are characterized by an efficiency, E, for a given set
of conditions:

(5.64)

5-170 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where E = Inlet efficiency (unitless)

Q = Total gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qi = Intercepted flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

The flow that is not intercepted is called carryover or bypass flow. It is defined as
follows:

Qb = Q – Qi (5.65)

Where Qb = Bypass low (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

5.7.5 Grate Inlet on Grade

Figure 5-19: Grate Inlet

As previously defined, the total gutter flow, Q, is composed of a frontal flow Qw and a
side flow Qs.

The ratio Rf of frontal flow intercepted to total frontal flow is expressed as:

Rf = 1 – Kcf (V – V0) (5.66)

Where Kcf = 0.295 SI, 0.090 U.S. customary

V = Average velocity in gutter (m/sec., ft/sec.)

V0 = Gutter velocity at which splash-over first happens
(m/sec., ft/sec.)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-171

Inlet Hydraulics

Note: If V < V0, then Rf = 1 (all the frontal flow is intercepted).

Also, Rf cannot exceed 1.0. The splash-over velocity, V0 is a

function of the grate type and the grate length, L.

The frontal flow intercepted, Qwi, is:

Qwi = RfQw

The ratio Rs of side flow intercepted to side flow is expressed as:

(5.67)

Where Kcs = 0.0828 SI, 0.15 U.S. customary

L = Grate length (m, ft)

The side flow intercepted, Qsi, is therefore:

Qsi = RsQs (5.68)

The total flow intercepted is:

Qi = Qwi + Qsi (5.69)

Where Qi = Total flow intercepted (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

The bypass flow is then:

Qb = Q – Q i (5.70)

Where Qb = Bypass flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

The efficiency of the grate is expressed as:

E = RfE0 + Rs(1 – E0) (5.71)

5-172 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Or,

E = Qi /Q (5.72)

5.7.6 Curb Inlet on Grade

Figure 5-20: Curb Inlet

The curb opening length Lr that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a uniform cross slope is computed as:

(5.73)

Where LT = Curb opening length required to intercept 100% of

gutter flow
Kc = 0.817 SI, 0.60 U.S. customary

In order to account for a locally or continually depressed gutter, an equivalent cross

slope, Se, is computed.

Figure 5-21: Composite Gutter Section

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-173

Inlet Hydraulics

S'w is calculated as:

SI Units (5.74)

U.S. Customary Units (5.75)

Where S'w = Gutter cross-slope at inlet location—measured

from pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Sw = Gutter cross-slope upstream of inlet—does not
account for local depression (m/m, ft/ft)
atotal = Total depression at inlet location—includes local
and continuous gutter depression (mm, in)
W = Larger of the gutter width and local-depression
width (m, ft)

The curb opening length LT that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a composite cross slope at the location of the inlet is:

(5.76)

The efficiency E of a curb opening shorter than the required length for total intercep-
tion is:

(5.77)

Where L = Curb opening length (m, ft)

5-174 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

5.7.7 Slot Inlet on Grade

Figure 5-22: Slot Inlet

The efficiency of a Slotted Inlet on Grade with an opening width greater than or equal
to 45 mm (1.75 in) is calculated using the same equations as for a curb opening inlet of
the same length.

5.7.8 Combination Inlet on Grade

Figure 5-23: Combination Inlet

HEC-22 distinguishes two cases:

• The grate and the curb opening are placed side by side. In this case, the flow inter-
ception by the curb opening is negligible, and the capacity of the combination
inlet is identical to that of the grate alone.
• The curb opening is extended upstream of the grate in order to intercept debris
that could otherwise clog the grate inlet. The flow intercepted by the combination
inlet is calculated as the flow intercepted by the curb opening upstream of the
grate inlet, plus the portion of the remaining flow intercepted by the grate.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-175

Inlet Hydraulics

Inlets in Sag

Note: Inlets in sag location operate as weirs at low water depth and as
orifices at higher depth.

Grate inlets alone are not recommended, as clogging of the

grate is likely to occur.

In contrast with inlets on grade, the efficiency of an inlet located in sag is always
assumed to be 1.0 (or 100%).

5.7.9 Grate Inlet in Sag

Figure 5-24: Grate Inlet

The flow Qw intercepted by a grate inlet operating as a weir is:

(5.78)

Where W = Width of the grate (m, ft)

L = Length of the grate (m, ft)
CW = Weir Coefficient (1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary)

d1 = Flow depth at middle of grate(m, ft)

d2 = Flow depth at side of grate opposite the curb (m,
ft)

The flow Qio intercepted by a grate inlet operating as an orifice is:

Q =0.67AgP(2gd)1/2 (5.79)

5-176 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Where Q = Capacity of the grate operating as an orifice (cfs,

m3/s)
A = Clear opening area of grate (ft2, m2)
d = Average depth of flow over grate (ft, m)
g = Acceleration due to gravity (ft/s2, m/s2)

The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated at any flow depth by using the
lesser of the intercepted flows computed using the weir or orifice equation:

(5.80)

This accounts for the three stages: weir flow, orifice flow and transitional flow.

5.7.10 Curb Inlet in Sag

Figure 5-25: Curb Inlet

Curb inlets are divided into 3 categories, based on their throat geometry: horizontal
(most common), vertical, and inclined, as defined in the figure below.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-177

Inlet Hydraulics

Figure 5-26: Curb Inlet Throat Types

Where h = Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)

di = Water depth at lip of curb (m, ft)

do = Effective head, measured from center of orifice

throat (m, ft)
 = Throat angle for inclined-throat inlets

Weir Flow
A curb inlet in a sag, without a locally or continuously depressed gutter, operates as a
weir for depths at curb (measured from the normal cross slope) that are less than or
equal to the curb opening height.

This condition can be expressed as:

dh (5.81)

Where d = Depth at curb—i.e., d = TSx (m, ft)

In the case of a depressed curb opening (local depression) or a continuously depressed

gutter, the previous condition becomes:

5-178 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

U.S. Customary SI Units (5.82)

Where d = Total depression, measured at inlet (mm, in)

D = Depth at curb, measured from normal cross-slope
(m, ft)

The intercepted flow Qiw by a curb-opening inlet operating as a weir, with a locally or
continuously depressed gutter, is:

Qiw = Cw1(L + 1.8W)d1.5 (5.83)

Where Cw1 = Weir coefficient (1.25 SI, 2.3 U.S. customary)

L = Curb-opening length (m, ft)

W = Lateral width of depression (m, ft)

However, if L is greater than or equal to 3.6 m (12 ft), then the following equation is
used, which is the same as the equation for curb-opening inlets without depression:

Qiw = Cw2Ld1.5 (5.84)

Where Cw2 = Weir coefficient (1.6 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary)

Orifice Flow
A curb inlet in a sump operates as an orifice for depths at the lip of a curb opening that
are greater than 1.4 times the curb opening height:

di  1.4h (5.85)

The intercepted flow Qio by a curb-opening inlet (depressed or undepressed) operating

as an orifice is:

Qio  CohL(2gdo)0.5 (5.86)

which is also expressed as:

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-179

Inlet Hydraulics

(5.87)

Where  = 90° for horizontal-throat inlets, 0° for vertical-

throat inlets

Transition Flow
At depths between 1.0 and 1.4 times the opening height, the flow is in a transition
stage.

This intercepted flow Qi is calculated conservatively in this depth range as:

Qi = min(Qiw, Qio) (5.88)

5.7.11 Slot Inlet in Sag

Slot inlet in sag includes:

• “Weir Flow” on page 5-178

• “Orifice Flow” on page 5-181
• “Transitional Flow” on page 5-181

Weir Flow
Slotted inlets located in sag operate as weirs to water depths, d (measured at the curb
from the normal cross slope), of about 0.06 m (0.2ft).

The intercepted flow Qiw is expressed as:

Qiw = CwLd1.5 (5.89)

Where Cw = Weir coefficient—varies with flow depth and slot

length (typically 1.4 SI, 2.48 U.S. customary)
d = Water depth at curb, measured from normal cross
slope (m, ft)
L = Slot length (m, ft)

5-180 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Bentley FlowMaster Theory

Orifice Flow
At water depths (measured at the curb) greater than about 0.12 m (0.4 ft), slotted inlets
perform as orifices.

The intercepted flow Qio is expressed as:

Qio = 0.8LW(2gd)0.5 (5.90)

Where W = Slot width (m, ft)

d = Water depth at slot (m, ft)

Transitional Flow
At depths between 0.06 m (measured at the slot from the normal cross slope) and 0.12
m, the flow is in a transition stage.

The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated in this depth range as:

Qi = min(Qiw, Qio) (5.91)

5.7.12 Combination Inlet in Sag

According to HEC-22, combination inlets are considered advisable for use in sags
where hazardous ponding occurs.

Equal Length Inlets

Equal length inlets refer to a grate inlet placed along the side of a curb-opening inlet of
identical length. At lower flow depths, the grate inlet is operating as a weir and the
interception capacity of the curb is negligible (unless the grate is clogged, in which
case the curb is intercepting some flow). The flow Qiw intercepted by the combination
is then:

Qiw = CwPd1.5 (5.92)

Where Cw = Weir coefficient (typically 1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S.

customary)
P = Perimeter of grate, disregarding side along curb
(m, ft)
d = Flow depth at curb (m, ft)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 5-181

Inlet Hydraulics

At higher flow depths, both the grate inlet and the curb-opening inlet are operating as
orifices.

Note: The clear opening area of the grate depends on the opening ratio
of the grate (HEC-22 defines an opening ratio for each grate
type), as well as the clogging factor you specify.

The flow Qio intercepted by the combination inlet operating as an orifice is:

Qio = CoAg(2gd)0.5 + CohL(2gdo)0.5 (5.93)

Where Co = Orifice coefficient (Co = 0.67)

Ag = Clear opening of grate (m2, ft2 )

g = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/
sec.2 )
h = Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)
do = Head, measured from the center of the orifice
throat (m, ft)

Sweeper Inlet
A sweeper inlet refers to a grate inlet placed at the downstream end of a longer curb
opening inlet. A sweeper inlet is more efficient than an equal length combination inlet
in intercepting debris.

Note that since the HEC-22 manual is not very explicit about this type of inlet in sag,
some assumptions were made in order to define the flows for this inlet.

The flow Qi intercepted by a sweeper inlet is the sum of the flow Qie as calculated
above for an equal length combination inlet of length L (where L is the length of the
grate) and the flow Qic intercepted by the additional length L (upsteam of the grate) of
the curb opening.

Qi = Qie + Qic (5.94)

5-182 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

Pavement Drainage 6
Note: This section was extracted from the Urban Drainage Design
Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular Number 22 (HEC-22),
Pavement Drainage; published by the Federal Highway
Administration in November 1996. All charts referred to in this
section are provided in “HEC 22 Charts” on page 7-277. The HEC-
22 methodology is used by Bentley FlowMaster to perform flow
computations through inlets.

Bentley FlowMaster performs hydraulic computations for

analyzing or sizing one inlet at a time. For analyzing or
designing an entire storm sewer network, Bentley Systems
offers StormCAD, which also follows the HEC-22 methodology
for inlet computations.

Effective drainage of highway pavements is essential to the maintenance of highway

service level and to traffic safety. Water on the pavement can interrupt traffic, reduce
skid resistance, increase potential for hydroplaning, limit visibility due to splash and
spray, and cause difficulty in steering a vehicle when the front wheels encounter
puddles.

Pavement drainage requires consideration of surface drainage, gutter flow, and inlet
capacity. The design of these elements is dependent on storm frequency and the allow-
able spread of storm water on the pavement surface. This section presents design guid-
ance for the design of these elements. Most of the information presented here was
originally published in HEC-12, Drainage of Highway Pavements, and AASHTO’s
Model Drainage Manual.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-183

Design Frequency and Spread

6.1 Design Frequency and Spread

Two of the more significant variables considered in the design of highway pavement
drainage are the frequency of the design runoff event and the allowable spread of
water on the pavement. A related consideration is the use of an event of lesser
frequency to check the drainage design.

Spread and design frequency are not independent. The implications of the use of a
criterion for spread of one-half of a traffic lane are considerably different for one
design frequency than for a lesser frequency. It also has different implications for a
low-traffic, low-speed highway than for a higher classification highway. These
subjects are central to the issue of highway pavement drainage and important to
highway safety.

6.1.1 Selection of Design Frequency and Design Spread

The objective of highway storm drainage design is to provide for safe passage of vehi-
cles during the design storm event. The design of a drainage system for a curbed
highway pavement section is to collect runoff in the gutter and convey it to pavement
inlets in a manner that provides reasonable safety for traffic and pedestrians at a
reasonable cost. As spread from the curb increases, the risks of traffic accidents and
delays, and the nuisance and possible hazard to pedestrian traffic increase.

The process of selecting the recurrence interval and spread for design involves deci-
sions regarding acceptable risks of accidents and traffic delays and acceptable costs
for the drainage system. Risks associated with water on traffic lanes are greater with
high traffic volumes, high speeds, and higher highway classifications than with lower
volumes, speeds, and highway classifications.

A summary of the major considerations that enter into the selection of design
frequency and design spread follows:

1. The classification of the highway is a good starting point in the selection process
since it defines the public’s expectations regarding water on the pavement surface.
Ponding on traffic lanes of high-speed, high-volume highways is contrary to the
public’s expectations and thus the risks of accidents and the costs of traffic delays
are high.
2. Design speed is important to the selection of design criteria. At speeds greater
than 70 km/hr (44 mi/hr), it has been shown that water on the pavement can cause
hydroplaning.
3. Projected traffic volumes are an indicator of the economic importance of keeping
the highway open to traffic. The costs of traffic delays and accidents increase with
increasing traffic volumes.

6-184 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

4. The intensity of rainfall events may significantly affect the selection of design
frequency and spread. Risks associated with the spread of water on pavements
may be less in arid areas subject to high intensity thunderstorm events than in
areas accustomed to frequent but less intense events.
5. Capital costs are neither the least nor last consideration. Cost considerations make
it necessary to formulate a rational approach to the selection of design criteria.
Tradeoffs between desirable and practicable criteria are sometimes necessary
because of costs. In particular, the costs and feasibility of providing for a given
design frequency and spread may vary significantly between projects. In some
cases, it may be practicable to significantly upgrade the drainage design and
reduce risks at moderate costs. In other instances, such as where extensive outfalls
or pumping stations are required, costs may be very sensitive to the criteria
selected for use in design.

Other considerations include inconvenience, hazards, and nuisances to pedestrian

traffic. These considerations should not be minimized and, in some locations such as
in commercial areas, may assume major importance. Local design practice may also
be a major consideration since it can affect the feasibility of designing to higher stan-
dards, and it influences the public’s perception of acceptable practice.

The relative elevation of the highway and surrounding terrain is an additional consid-
eration where water can be drained only through a storm drainage system, as in under-
passes and depressed sections. The potential for ponding to hazardous depths should
be considered in selecting the frequency and spread criteria and in checking the design
against storm runoff events of lesser frequency than the design event.

Spread on traffic lanes can be tolerated to greater widths where traffic volumes and
speeds are low. Spreads of one-half of a traffic lane or more are usually considered a
minimum type design for low-volume local roads.

The selection of design criteria for intermediate types of facilities may be the most
difficult. For example, some arterials with relatively high traffic volumes and speeds
may not have shoulders which will convey the design runoff without encroaching on
the traffic lanes. In these instances, an assessment of the relative risks and costs of
various design spreads may be helpful in selecting appropriate design criteria. Table
6-1 provides suggested minimum design frequencies and spread based on the type of
highway and traffic speed.

The recommended design frequency for depressed sections and underpasses where
ponded water can be removed only through the storm drainage system is a 50-year
frequency event. The use of a lesser frequency event, such as a 100-year storm, to
assess hazards at critical locations where water can pond to appreciable depths is
commonly referred to as a check storm or check event.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-185

Design Frequency and Spread

6.1.2 Selection of Check Storm and Spread

A check storm should be used any time runoff could cause unacceptable flooding
during less frequent events. Also, inlets should always be evaluated for a check storm
when a series of inlets terminates at a sag vertical curve where ponding to hazardous
depths could occur.

The frequency selected for the check storm should be based on the same consider-
ations used to select the design storm, i.e., the consequences of spread exceeding that
chosen for design and the potential for ponding. Where no significant ponding can
occur, check storms are normally unnecessary.

Criteria for spread during the check event are: 1) one lane open to traffic during the
check storm event, and 2) one lane free of water during the check storm event. These
criteria differ substantively, but each sets a standard by which the design can be evalu-
ated.

Table 6-1: Suggested Minimum Design Frequency and Spread

Road Classification Design Design

Frequency Spread

High Volume, <70 km/hr 10-year Shoulder

Divided, or (45 mph) +1m (3ft)
Bi-Directional
>70 km/hr 10-year Shoulder
(45 mph)

Sag Point 50-year Shoulder

+1m (3ft)

Collector <70 km/hr 10-year 1/2 driving

(45 mph lane

>70 km/hr 10-year Shoulder

(45 mph)

Sag Point 10-year 1/2 driving

lane

Local Streets Low ADT 5-year 1/2 driving

lane

High ADT 10-year 1/2 driving

lane

Sag Point 10-year 1/2 driving

lane

6-186 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.2 Surface Drainage

When rain falls on a sloped pavement surface, it forms a thin film of water that
increases in thickness as it flows to the edge of the pavement. Factors which influence
the depth of water on the pavement are the length of flow path, surface texture, surface
slope, and rainfall intensity. As the depth of water on the pavement increases, the
potential for vehicular hydroplaning increases. For the purposes of highway drainage,
a discussion of hydroplaning is presented and design guidance for the following
drainage elements is presented:

• longitudinal pavement slope

• cross or transverse pavement slope
• curb and gutter design
• roadside and median ditches
• bridge decks
• median barriers
• impact attenuators

Additional technical information on the mechanics of surface drainage can be found in

Improved Surface Drainage of Pavements, published by the Federal Highway Admin-
istration in 1995.

6.2.1 Hydroplaning

As the depth of water flowing over a roadway surface increases, the potential for
hydroplaning increases. When a rolling tire encounters a film of water on the roadway,
the water is channeled through the tire tread pattern and through the surface roughness
of the pavement. Hydroplaning occurs when the drainage capacity of the tire tread
pattern and the pavement surface is exceeded and the water begins to build up in front
of the tire. As the water builds up, a water wedge is created and this wedge produces a
hydrodynamic force which can lift the tire off the pavement surface. This is consid-
ered as full dynamic hydroplaning and, since water offers little shear resistance, the
tire loses its tractive ability and the driver has a loss of control of the vehicle.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-187

Surface Drainage

Hydroplaning is a function of the water depth, roadway geometrics, vehicle speed,

tread depth, tire inflation pressure, and conditions of the pavement surface. It has been
shown that hydroplaning can occur at speeds of 89 km/hr (55 mph) with a water depth
of 2 mm (0.08 in). The following can reduce the hydroplaning potential of a roadway
surface:

1. Design the highway geometries to reduce the drainage path lengths of the water
flowing over the pavement. This will prevent flow build-up.
2. Increase the pavement surface texture depth by such methods as grooving of Port-
land cement concrete. An increase of pavement surface texture will increase the
drainage capacity at the tire pavement interface.
3. The use of open graded asphaltic pavements has been shown to greatly reduce the
hydroplaning potential of the roadway surface. This reduction is due to the ability
of the water to be forced through the pavement under the tire. This releases any
hydrodynamic pressures that are created and reduces the potential for the tire to
hydroplane.
4. The use of drainage structures along the roadway to capture the flow of water over
the pavement will reduce the thickness of the film of water and reduce the hydro-
planing potential of the roadway surface.

6.2.2 Longitudinal Slope

Experience has shown that the recommended minimum values of roadway longitu-
dinal slope given in the AASHTO Policy on Geometric Design will provide safe,
acceptable pavement drainage. In addition, the following general guidelines are
presented:

1. A minimum longitudinal gradient is more important for a curbed pavement than

for an uncurbed pavement since the water is constrained by the curb. However,
flat gradients on uncurbed pavements can lead to a spread problem if vegetation is
allowed to build up along the pavement edge.
2. Desirable gutter grades should not be less than 0.5 percent for curbed pavements
with an absolute minimum of 0.3 percent. Minimum grades can be maintained in
very flat terrain by use of a rolling profile, or by warping the cross slope to
achieve rolling gutter profiles.
3. To provide adequate drainage in sag vertical curves, a minimum slope of 0.3
percent should be maintained within 15 meters (50 ft) of the low point of the
curve. This is accomplished where the length of the curve in meters divided by the
algebraic difference in grades in percent (K) is equal to or less than 50 (167 in
U.S. customary units). This is represented as:

6-188 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

(6.1)

Where K = Vertical curve constant (m/%, ft/%)

L = Horizontal length of curve (m, ft)
Gi = Grade of roadway (%)

6.2.3 Cross (Transverse) Slope

Table 6-2 indicates an acceptable range of cross slopes as specified in AASHTO’s

policy on geometric design of highways and streets. These cross slopes are a compro-
mise between the need for reasonably steep cross slopes for drainage and relatively
flat cross slopes for driver comfort and safety. These cross slopes represent standard
practice.

As reported in Pavement and Geometric Design Criteria for Minimizing Hydro-

planing, cross slopes of 2 percent have little effect on driver effort in steering or on
friction demand for vehicle stability. Use of a cross slope steeper than 2 percent on
pavements with a central crown line is not desirable. In areas of intense rainfall, a
somewhat steeper cross slope (2.5 percent) may be used to facilitate drainage.

On multi-lane highways where three (3) lanes or more are sloped in the same direc-
tion, it is desirable to counter the resulting increase in flow depth by increasing the
cross slope of the outermost lanes. The two (2) lanes adjacent to the crown line should
be pitched at the normal slope, and successive lane pairs, or portions thereof outward,
should be increased by about 0.5 to 1 percent. The maximum pavement cross slope
should be limited to 4 percent (refer to table 6-2).

Additional guidelines related to cross slope are:

1. Although not widely encouraged, inside lanes can be sloped toward the median if
conditions warrant.
2. Median areas should not be drained across travel lanes.
3. The number and length of flat pavement sections in cross slope transition areas
should be minimized. Consideration should be given to increasing cross slopes in
sag vertical curves, crest vertical curves, and in sections of flat longitudinal
grades.
4. Shoulders should be sloped to drain away from the pavement, except with raised,
narrow medians and super-elevations.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-189

Surface Drainage

6.2.4 Curb and Gutter

Curbs are normally used at the outside edge of pavements for low-speed, highway
facilities, and in some instances adjacent to shoulders on moderate to high-speed facil-
ities. They serve the following purposes:

• contain the surface runoff within the roadway and away from adjacent properties,
• prevent erosion on fill slopes,
• provide pavement delineation, and
• enable the orderly development of property adjacent to the roadway.

Table 6-2: Normal Pavement Cross Slopes

Surface Type Range in Rate of Surface

Slope

2 Lanes (High-Type Surface) 0.015 – 0.020

3 or more lanes, each 0.015 minimum; increase

direction (High-Type Surface) 0.005 to 0.010 per lane; 0.040
maximum

Intermediate Surface 0.015 – 0.030

Low-Type Surface 0.020 – 0.060

Bituminous or Concrete 0.020 – 0.060

Shoulders

Bituminous or Concrete >= 0.040

Shoulders With Curbs

Gutters formed in combination with curbs are available in 0.3 through 1.0 meter (12
through 39 inch) widths. Gutter cross slopes may be equal to that of the pavement or
may be designed with a steeper cross slope, usually 80 mm per meter (1 inch per foot)
steeper than the shoulder or parking lane (if used). AASHTO geometric guidelines
state that an 8% slope is a common maximum cross slope.

A curb and gutter combination forms a triangular channel that can convey runoff less
than or equal to the design flow without interruption of the traffic. When a design flow
occurs, there is a spread or widening of the conveyed water surface. The water spreads
to include not only the gutter width, but also parking lanes or shoulders, and portions
of the traveled surface. Spread is what concerns the hydraulic engineer in curb and
gutter flow. The distance of the spread, T, is measured perpendicular to the curb face
to the extent of the water on the roadway and is shown in Figure 6-1.

6-190 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Limiting this width becomes a very important design criterion and will be discussed in
detail in “Flow in Gutters” on page 6-193.

Where practical, runoff from cut slopes and other areas draining toward the roadway
should be intercepted before it reaches the highway. By doing so, the deposition of
sediment and other debris on the roadway as well as the amount of water which must
be carried in the gutter section will be minimized. Where curbs are not needed for
traffic control, shallow ditch sections at the edge of the roadway pavement or shoulder
offer advantages over curbed sections by providing less of a hazard to traffic than a
near-vertical curb and by providing hydraulic capacity that is not dependent on spread
on the pavement. These ditch sections are particularly appropriate where curbs have
historically been used to prevent water from eroding fill slopes.

6.2.5 Roadside and Median Channels

Figure 6-1: Typical Gutter Sections

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-191

Surface Drainage

Roadside channels are commonly used with uncurbed roadway sections to convey
runoff from the highway pavement and from areas which drain toward the highway.
Due to right-of-way limitations, roadside channels cannot be used on most urban arte-
rials. They can be used in cut sections, depressed sections, and other locations where
sufficient right-of-way is available and driveways or intersections are infrequent.

To prevent drainage from the median areas from running across the travel lanes, slope
median areas and inside shoulders to a center swale. This design is particularly impor-
tant for high speed facilities and for facilities with more than two lanes of traffic in
each direction.

6.2.6 Bridge Decks

Bridge deck drainage is similar to that of curbed roadway sections. Effective bridge
deck drainage is important for the following reasons:

• Deck structural and reinforcing steel is susceptible to corrosion from deicing salts
• Moisture on bridge decks freezes before surface roadways
• Hydroplaning often occurs at shallower depths on bridges due to the reduced
surface texture of concrete bridge decks

Bridge deck drainage is often less efficient than roadway sections because cross slopes
are flatter, parapets collect large amounts of debris, and drainage inlets or typical
bridge scuppers are less hydraulically efficient and more easily clogged by debris.
Because of the difficulties in providing for and maintaining adequate deck drainage
systems, gutter flow from roadways should be intercepted before it reaches a bridge.
For similar reasons, zero gradients and sag vertical curves should be avoided on
bridges. Additionally, runoff from bridge decks should be collected immediately after
it flows onto the subsequent roadway section where larger grates and inlet structures
can be used.

A detailed coverage of bridge deck drainage systems is included in Design of Bridge

Deck Drainage, published by the Federal Highway Administration in 1993.

6.2.7 Median Barriers

Slope the shoulder areas adjacent to median barriers to the center to prevent drainage
from running across the traveled pavement. Where median barriers are used, and
particularly on horizontal curves with associated superelevations, it is necessary to
provide inlets or slotted drains to collect the water accumulated against the barrier.
Additionally, some highway department agencies use a piping system to convey water
through the barrier.

6-192 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.2.8 Impact Attenuators

The location of impact attenuator systems should be reviewed to determine the need
for drainage structures in these areas. With some impact attenuator systems it is neces-
sary to have a clear or unobstructed opening as traffic approaches the point of impact
to allow a vehicle to impact the system head on. If the impact attenuator is placed in an
area where superelevation or other grade separation occurs, grate inlets and/or slotted
drains may be needed to prevent water from running through the clear opening and
crossing the highway lanes or ramp lanes. Curb, curb-type structures or swales cannot
be used to direct water across this clear opening as vehicle vaulting could occur.

6.3 Flow in Gutters

A pavement gutter is defined, for purposes of this circular, as a section of pavement
adjacent to the roadway which conveys water during a storm runoff event. It may
include a portion or all of a travel lane.

Gutter sections can be categorized as conventional or shallow swale type as illustrated

in Figure 6-1. Conventional curb and gutter sections usually have a triangular shape
with the curb forming the near-vertical leg of the triangle. Conventional gutters may
have a straight cross slope (Figure 6-1, a.1.), a composite cross slope where the gutter
slope varies from the pavement cross slope (Figure 6-1, a.2.), or a parabolic section
(Figure 6-1, a.3.). Shallow swale gutters typically have V-shaped or circular sections
as illustrated in Figure 6-1, b.1, b.2., and b.3., respectively, and are often used in paved
median areas on roadways with inverted crowns.

6.3.1 Capacity Relationship

Gutter flow calculations are necessary to establish the spread of water on the shoulder,
parking lane, or pavement section. A modification of the Manning equation can be
used for computing flow in triangular channels. The modification is necessary because
the hydraulic radius in the equation does not adequately describe the gutter cross
section, particularly where the top width of the water surface may be more than 40
times the depth at the curb. To compute gutter flow, the Manning equation is inte-
grated for an increment of width across the section. The resulting equation is:

(6.2)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-193

Flow in Gutters

Where Kc = 0.376 SI, 0.56 U.S. customary

n = Manning’s coefficient (see Table 6-3)

Q = Flow rate (m3 /sec., ft3/sec.)
T = Width of flow—spread (m, ft)
Sx = Cross slope (m/m, ft/ft)

SL = Longitudinal slope (m/m, ft/ft)

Equation 6.2 neglects the resistance of the curb face since this resistance is negligible.

Spread on the pavement and flow depth at the curb are often used as criteria for
spacing pavement drainage inlets. Design Chart 1 in “HEC 22 Charts” on page 7-277
is a nomograph for solving Equation 6.2. The chart can be used for either criterion
with the relationship:

(6.3)

Where d = Depth of flow (m, ft)

Chart 1 can be used for direct solution of gutter flow where the Manning n value is
0.016. For other values of n, divide the value of Qn by n. Instructions for use and an
example problem solution are provided on the chart.

Table 6-3: Manning’s n for Street and Pavement Gutters

Type of Gutter or Manning’s n

Pavement

Concrete gutter, trowled finish 0.012

Asphalt pavement, smooth 0.013

texture

Asphalt pavement, rough 0.016

texture

Concrete gutter-asphalt 0.013

pavement, smooth

Concrete gutter-asphalt 0.015

pavement, rough

6-194 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Table 6-3: Manning’s n for Street and Pavement Gutters

Type of Gutter or Manning’s n

Pavement

Concrete pavement, float 0.014

finish

Concrete pavement, broom 0.016

finish

For gutters with small slope, where sediment may accumulate,

increase the above values of “n” by 0.02

Reference: USDOT, FHWA, HDS-3

6.3.2 Conventional Curb and Gutter Sections

Conventional gutters begin at the inside base of the curb and usually extend from the
curb face toward the roadway centerline a distance of 0.3 to 1 meter. As illustrated in
Figure 6-1, gutters can have uniform, composite, or curved sections. Uniform gutter
sections have a cross-slope which is equal to the cross-slope of the shoulder or travel
lane adjacent to the gutter. Gutters having composite sections are depressed in relation
to the adjacent pavement slope. That is, the paved gutter has a cross-slope which is
steeper than that of the adjacent pavement. This concept is illustrated in Example 6-1.
Curved gutter sections are sometimes found along older city streets or highways with
curved pavement sections. Procedures for computing the capacity of curb and gutter
sections follow.

Conventional Gutters of Uniform Cross Slope

The nomograph in Chart 1 solves Equation 6.2 for gutters having triangular cross
sections. Example 6-1 illustrates its use for the analysis of conventional gutters with
uniform cross slope.

EXAMPLE 6-1

Given:

SL = 0.0010 m/m
SX = 0.020 m/m
n = 0.016

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-195

Flow in Gutters

Find:

1. Spread at flow of 0.05 m3/sec. (1.8 ft3/sec.)

2. Gutter flow at spread of 2.5 m (8.2 ft)

Solution 1:

Compute spread T, using Equation 6.2 or from Chart 1.

T = 2.7 m (8/9 ft)

Solution 2:

Using Equation 6.2 or Chart 1 with T = 2.5 m, and the preceding information,
determine Qn.

Qn = 0.00064 m3/sec. (1.4 ft3/sec.)

Composite Gutter Sections

The design of composite gutter sections requires consideration of flow in the
depressed segment of the gutter, Qw. Equation 6.4, displayed graphically as Chart 2, is
provided for use with Equations 6.5 and 6.6 and Chart 1 to determine the flow in a
width of gutter in a composite cross section, W, less than the total spread, T. The
procedure for analyzing composite gutter sections is demonstrated in Example 6-2.

6-196 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

(6.4)

(6.5)

Where Qw = Flow rate in depressed section of gutter (m3/sec.,

ft3/sec.)
Q = Gutter flow rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qs = Flow capacity of gutter section above depressed
section (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

(6.6)

Where Eo = Ratio of flow in a chosen width (usually the width

of a grate) to the total gutter flow (Qw/Q)

Sw = Sx+a/W (see Figure 6-1 a.2)

Figure 6-2 illustrates a design chart for a composite gutter with a 0.60 m (2 foot) wide
gutter section with a 50 mm depression at the curb that begins at the projection of the
uniform cross slope at the curb face. A series of charts similar to Figure 6-2 for typical
gutter configurations could be developed.

EXAMPLE 6-2

Given: Gutter section illustrated in Figure 6-1 a.2 with:

W = 0.6 m (2 ft)
SL = 0.01

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-197

Flow in Gutters

Sx = 0.020
n = 0.016
Gutter depression, a = 50 mm

Find:

1. Gutter flow at a spread, T, of 2.5 m (8.2 ft)

2. Spread at a flow of 0.12 m3/sec. (4.2 ft3/sec.)

Solution 1:

1. Compute the cross-slope of the depressed gutter, Sw, and the width of spread
from the junction of the gutter and the road to the limit of the spread, Ts.
Sw = a / W + Sx
Sw = [(50) / 1000] / (0.6) + (0.020) = 0.102 m/m
Ts = T – W = 2.5 m – 0.6 m
Ts = 1.9 m (6.2 ft)

2. From Equation 6.2 or from Chart 1 (using Ts):

Qsn = (0.376)(0.02)1.67(0.01)0.5(1.9)2.67

Qsn = 0.00031 m3/sec. (0.011 ft3/sec.)

Qs = Qs / n = 0.00031 / 0.016

Qs = 0.019 m3/sec. (0.75 ft3/sec.)

3. Determine the gutter flow, Q, using Equation 6.4 or Chart 2.

T / W = 2.5 / 0.6 = 4.17
Sw / Sx = 0.103 / 0.020 = 5.15

Eo = 1 / {1+[(Sw / Sx) / (1 + (Sw / Sx) / (T / W – 1))2.67 – 1]}

Eo = 1 / {1+[5.15 / (1 + (5.15) / (4.17 – 1))2.67 – 1]}

Eo = 0.70

Or, from Chart 2, Eo = Qw / Q = 0.70

Q = Qw / Eo = Qs / (1 – Eo)

6-198 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Q = 0.019 / (1 – 0.70)

Q = 0.06 m3/sec. (2.3 ft3/sec.)

Figure 6-2: Spread Curves for a Composite Gutter Section

Solution 2:

1. Try Qs – 0.04 m3/sec. (1.4 ft3/sec.)

2. Compute Qw
Qw = Q – Qs = 0.12 – 0.04

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-199

Flow in Gutters

Qw = Q – Qs = 0.12 – 0.04

Qw = 0.08 m3/sec. (2.8 ft3/sec.)

3. Using Equation 6.4 or from Chart 2, determine the W / T ratio.

Eo = Qw / Q = 0.08 / 0.12 = 0.67
Sw / Sx = 0.103 / 0.020 = 5.15
W / T = 0.23 (from Chart 2)

4. Compute spread based on the assumed Qs.

T = W / (W / T) = 0.6 / 0.23
T = 2.6 m (8.6 ft)

5. Compute Ts based on assumed Qs.

Ts = T – W = 2.6 – 0.6 = 2.0 m (6.6 ft)

6. Use Equation 6.2 or Chart 1 to determine Qs for computed Ts.

Qsn = (0.376)(0.02)1.67(0.01)0.5(2.0)2.67

Qsn = 0.00035 m3/sec. (0.00123 ft3/sec.)

Qs = Qsn / n = 0.00035 / 0.016

Qs = 0.022 m3/sec. (0.77 ft3/sec.)

7. Compare the computed Qs with the assumed Qs.

Qs assumed = 0.04 > 0.022 = Qs computed

8. Try a new assumed Qs and repeat steps 2 through 7.

Assume Qs = 0.058 m3/sec. (2.0 ft3/sec.)

Qw = 0.12 – 0.058 = 0.62 m3/sec. (2.2 ft3/sec.)

Eo = Qw / Q = 0.062 / 0.12 = 0.52
Sw / Sx = 5.15
W / T = 0.17
T = 0.60 / 0.17 = 3.5 m (11.5 ft)
Ts = 3.5 – 0.6 = 2.9 m (9.5 ft)

6-200 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Qsn = 0.00064 m3/sec. (0.032 ft3/sec.)

Qs = 0.00094 / 0.016 = 0.059 m3/sec. (2.1 ft3/sec.)

Qs assumed = 0.058 m3/sec. equal to 0.059 m3/sec. = Qs computed

Conventional Gutters with Curved Sections

Where the pavement cross section is curved, gutter capacity varies with the configura-
tion of the pavement. For this reason, discharge-spread or discharge-depth at-the-curb
relationships developed for one pavement configuration are not applicable to another
section with a different crown height or half-width.

6.3.3 Shallow Swale Sections

Where curbs are not needed for traffic control, a small swale section of circular or V
shape may be used to convey runoff from the pavement. As an example, the control of
pavement runoff on fills may be needed to protect the embankment from erosion.
Small swale sections may have sufficient capacity to convey the flow to a location
suitable for interception.

V-Sections
Chart 1 can be used to compute the flow in a shallow V-shaped section. When using
Chart 1 for V-shaped channels, the cross slope, Sx is determined by the following
equation:

(6.7)

Example 6-3 demonstrates the use of Chart 1 to analyze a V-shaped shoulder gutter.
Analysis of a V-shaped gutter resulting from a roadway with an inverted crown
section is illustrated in Example 6-4.

EXAMPLE 6-3

Given: A V-shaped roadside gutter (Figure 6-1 a.1) with:

SL = 0.01
n = 0.016
Sx1 = 0.25
Sx2 = 0.04

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-201

Flow in Gutters

Sx3 = 0.02
Distance BC = 0.6 m (2.0 ft)

Find:

1. Spread at a flow of 0.05 m3/sec. (1.8 ft3/sec.)

2. Flow at a spread of 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

Solution 1:

1. Calculate Sx.
Sx = Sx1Sx2 / (Sx1 + Sx2) = (0.25)(0.04) / (0.25 + 0.04)
Sx = 0.0345
2. Using Equation 6.2 or Chart 1:

T' = [(0.05)(0.016) / {(0.376)(0.0345)1.67(0.01)0.5}]0.375

T' = 1.94 m (6.4 ft)
T' is the hypothetical spread that is correct if it is contained within Sx1 and
Sx2.)

3. To determine if T' is within Sx1 and Sx2, compute the flow depth, dB, at point
B, and use this depth to find the horizontal distance between points A and B,
AB. dB can be computed using the following geometric relationship:
T' = (dB / Sx1) + (dB / Sx2), from which
dB = T'(Sx1)(Sx2) / (Sx1 + Sx2) = (1.94)(0.25)(0.04) / (0.25 + 0.04)
dB = 0.067 m (0.22 ft)
AB = dB / Sx1 = 0.067 / 0.25
AB = 0.27 m (0.9 ft)
AC = AB + 0.6 m = 0.27 m + 0.6 m.
AC = 0.87 m (2.9 ft)
0.87 m < T' therefore, spread falls outside the V-shaped gutter section
4. Solve for the depth at point C, dC, and compute the actual spread from the
edge of gutter section Ts.
dC = dB – BC(Sx2) = (0.067) – (0.60)(0.04)

6-202 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

dC = 0.043 m (0.14 ft)

Therefore,
Ts = dC / Sx3 = (0.043) / (0.02)
Ts = 2.15 m (7.1 ft)

Solution 2:

1. Compute the depth at point C, dC.

dC = (Ts)(Sx3) = (1.80 m)(0.02)
dC = 0.036 m (0.12 ft)

2. Compute dB.
dB = [(BC)(Sx2)] + dC
dB = [(0.60 m)(0.04)] + 0.036 m
dB = 0.06 m (0.2 ft)

3. Compute T'.
T' = dB / Sx1 + BC + dC / Sx2
T' = (0.06 / 0.25) + 0.6 + (0.036 / 0.04)
T' = 1.74 m (5.7 ft)

4. Using Equation 6.2 or Chart 1, compute Q.

Sx = (0.25)(0.04) / (0.25 + 0.04)
Sx = 0.034

Q = (0.376)(0.034)1.67(0.01)0.5(1.74)2.67 / (0.016)

Q = 0.04 m3/sec. (1.3 ft3/sec.)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-203

Flow in Gutters

EXAMPLE 6-4

Circular Sections
Flow in shallow circular gutter sections can be represented by the relationship:

6-204 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

(6.8)

Where d = Depth of flow in circular gutter (m, ft)

D = Diameter of circular gutter (m, ft)
Kc = 1.179 SI, 0.972 U.S. customary

which is displayed on Chart 3. The chord of the arc which can be computed using
Equation 6.9 represents the width of circular gutter section Tw.

(6.9)

Where Tw = Width of circular gutter section (m, ft)

r = Radius of flow in circular gutter (m, ft)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-205

Flow in Gutters

EXAMPLE 6-5

6.3.4 Flow in Sag Vertical Curves

As gutter flow approaches the low point in a sag vertical curve the flow can exceed the
allowable design spread values as a result of the continually decreasing gutter slope.
The spread in these areas should be checked to insure it remains within allowable
limits. If the computed spread exceeds design values, additional inlets should be
provided to reduce the flow as it approaches the low point. Sag vertical curves and
measures for reducing spread are discussed further in “Drainage Inlet Design” on
page 6-210.

6-206 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.3.5 Relative Flow Capacities

Example 6-1 and Example 6-2 illustrate the advantage of a composite gutter section.
The capacity of the section with a depressed gutter in the examples is 70 percent
greater than that of the section with a straight cross slope with all other parameters
held constant.

Equation (6.2) can be used to examine the relative effects of changing the values of
spread, cross slope, and longitudinal slope on the capacity of a section with a straight
cross slope.

To examine the effects of cross slope on gutter capacity, Equation (6.2) can be trans-
formed as follows into a relationship between Sx and Q as follows:

Let

(6.10)

Then

(6.11)

And

(6.12)

Similar transformations can be performed to evaluate the effects of changing longitu-

dinal slope and width of spread on gutter capacity resulting in Equations 6.13 and 6.14
respectively.

(6.13)

(6.14)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-207

Flow in Gutters

Equations 6.10, 6.13, and 6.14 are illustrated in Figure 6-3. As illustrated, the effects
of spread on gutter capacity are greater than the effects of cross slope and longitudinal
slope, as would be expected due to the larger exponent of the spread term. The magni-
tude of the effect is demonstrated when gutter capacity with a 3 meter (9.8 ft) spread is
18.8 times greater than with a 1 meter (3.3 ft) spread, and 3 times greater than a spread
of 2 meters (6.6 ft).

The effects of cross slope are also relatively great as illustrated by a comparison of
gutter capacities with different cross slopes. At a cross slope of 4 percent, a gutter has
10 times the capacity of a gutter of 1 percent cross slope. A gutter at 4 percent cross
slope has 3.2 times the capacity of a gutter at 2 percent cross slope.

Figure 6-3: Relative Effects of Spread, Cross Slope, and Longitudinal

Slope on Gutter Capacity

6-208 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Little latitude is generally available to vary longitudinal slope in order to increase

gutter capacity, but slope changes which change gutter capacity are frequent. Figure 6-
3 shows that a change from S = 0.04 to 0.02 will reduce gutter capacity to 71 percent
of the capacity at S = 0.04.

Table 6-4: Spread at Average Velocity in a Reach of Triangular Gutter

T1/T2 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8

Ta/T2 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.74 0.77 0.82 0.86 0.90

6.3.6 Gutter Flow Time

The flow time in gutters is an important component of the time of concentration for
the contributing drainage area to an inlet. To find the gutter flow component of the
time of concentration, a method for estimating the average velocity in a reach of gutter
is needed. The velocity in a gutter varies with the flow rate and the flow rate varies
with the distance along the gutter, i.e., both the velocity and flow rate in a gutter are
spatially varied. The time of flow can be estimated by use of an average velocity
obtained by integration of the Manning equation for the gutter section with respect to
time.

Table 6-4 and Chart 4 can be used to determine the average velocity in triangular
gutter sections. In the table, T1 and T2 are the spread at the upstream and downstream
ends of the gutter section respectively. Ta is the spread at the average velocity. Chart 4
is a nomograph to solve equation 6.15 for the velocity in a triangular channel with
known cross slope, gutter slope, and spread.

(6.15)

Where Kc = 0.752 SI, 1.11 U.S. customary

V = Velocity in the triangular channel (m/sec., ft/sec.)

Example 6-6 illustrates the use of Table 6-4 and Chart 4 to determine the average
gutter velocity.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-209

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-6

6.4 Drainage Inlet Design

The hydraulic capacity of a storm drain inlet depends upon its geometry as well as the
characteristics of the gutter flow. Inlet capacity governs both the rate of water removal
from the gutter and the amount of water that can enter the storm drainage system.
Inadequate inlet capacity or poor inlet location may cause flooding on the roadway
resulting in a hazard to the traveling public.

6-210 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.4.1 Inlet Types

Storm drain inlets are used to collect runoff and discharge it to an underground storm
drainage system. Inlets are typically located in gutter sections, paved medians, and
roadside and median ditches. Inlets used for the drainage of highway surfaces can be
divided into the following four classes:

• Grate inlets
• Curb-opening inlets
• Slotted inlets
• Combination inlets

Grate inlets consist of an opening in the gutter or ditch covered by a grate. Curb
opening inlets are vertical openings in the curb covered by a top slab. Slotted inlets
consist of a pipe cut along the longitudinal axis with bars perpendicular to the opening
to maintain the slotted opening. Combination inlets consist of both a curb opening
inlet and a grate inlet placed in a side-by-side configuration, but the curb opening may
be located in part upstream of the grate. Figure 6-4 illustrates each class of inlets.
Slotted drains may also be used with grates and each type of inlet may be installed
with or without a depression of the gutter.

6.4.2 Characteristics and Uses of Inlets

Grate inlets, as a class, perform satisfactorily over a wide range of gutter grades.
Grate inlets generally lose capacity with increase in grade, but to a lesser degree than
curb opening inlets. The principal advantage of grate inlets is that they are installed
along the roadway where the water is flowing. Their principal disadvantage is that
floating trash or debris may clog them. For safety reasons, preference should be given
to grate inlets where out-of-control vehicles might be involved. Additionally, where
bicycle traffic occurs, grates should be bicycle safe.

Curb-opening inlets are most effective on flatter slopes, in sags, and with flows
which typically carry significant amounts of floating debris. The interception capacity
of curb-opening inlets decreases as the gutter grade steepens. Consequently, the use of
curb-opening inlets is recommended in sags and on grades less than 3%. Of course,
they are bicycle safe as well.

Combination inlets provide the advantages of both curb opening and grate inlets.
This combination results in a high capacity inlet which offers the advantages of both
grate and curb-opening inlets. When the curb opening precedes the grate in a Sweeper
configuration, the curb-opening inlet acts as a trash interceptor during the initial
phases of a storm. Used in a sag configuration, the sweeper inlet can have a curb
opening on both sides of the grate.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-211

Drainage Inlet Design

Slotted inlets can be used in areas where it is desirable to intercept sheet flow before
it crosses onto a section of roadway. Their principal advantage is their ability to inter-
cept flow over a wide section. However, slotted inlets are very susceptible to clogging
from sediments and debris, and are not recommended for use in environments where
significant sediment or debris loads may be present. Slotted inlets on a longitudinal
grade do have the same hydraulic capacity as curb openings when debris is not a
factor.

Figure 6-4: Classes of Storm Drain Inlets

6.4.3 Inlet Capacity

Several agencies and manufacturers of grates have investigated inlet interception

capacity. Hydraulic tests on grate inlets and slotted inlets included in this document
were conducted by the Bureau of Reclamation for the Federal Highway Administra-
tion. Four of the grates selected for testing were rated highest in bicycle safety tests,
three have designs and bar spacing similar to those proven bicycle-safe, and a parallel
bar grate was used as a standard with which to compare the performance of others.

6-212 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figures 7.5 through 7.10 show the inlet grates for which design procedures were
developed. For ease in identification, the following terms have been adopted:

P-50: Parallel bar grate with bar spacing 48 mm (1-7/8 in) on center (Figure 6-5).
P-50x100: Parallel bar grate with bar spacing 48 mm (1-7/8 in) on center and 10
mm (3/8 in) diameter lateral rods spaced at 102 mm (4 in) on center (Figure 6-5).
P-30: Parallel bar grate with 29 mm (1-1/8 in) on center bar spacing (Figure 6-6).
Curved Vane: Curved vane grate with 83 mm (3-1/4 in) longitudinal bar and 108
mm (4-1/4 in) transverse bar spacing on center Figure 6-7).
45° – 60 Tilt Bar: 45° tilt-bar grate with 57 mm (2-1/4 in) longitudinal bar and
102 mm (4 in) transverse bar spacing on center (Figure 6-8).
45° – 85 Tilt Bar: 45° tilt-bar grate with 83 mm (3-1/4 in) longitudinal bar and
102 mm (4 in) transverse bar spacing on center (Figure 6-8).
30° – 85 Tilt Bar: 30° tilt-bar grate with 83 mm (3-1/4 in) longitudinal bar and
102 mm (4 in) transverse bar spacing on center (Figure 6-9).
Reticuline: Honeycomb pattern of lateral bars and longitudinal bearing bars
(Figure 6-10).

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-213

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-5: P-50 and P-50x100 Grates

The interception capacity of curb-opening inlets has also been investigated by several
agencies. Design procedures adopted for this Circular are largely derived from experi-
mental work at Colorado State University for the Federal Highway Administration, as
reported in both Hydraulics of Runoff from Developed Surfaces and Hydraulic Design
of Depressed Curb-Opening Inlets.

6-214 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figure 6-6: P-30 Grate

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-215

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-7: Curved Vane Grate

6-216 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figure 6-8: 45 – 60-Degree and 45-85-Degree Tilt-Bar Grates

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-217

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-9: 30 – 85-Degree Tilt-Bar Grate

6-218 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figure 6-10: Reticuline Grate

Factors Affecting Interception Capacity on Continuous Grades

Inlet interception capacity, Qi, is the flow intercepted by an inlet under a given set of
conditions. The efficiency of an inlet, E, is the percent of total flow that the inlet will
intercept for those conditions. The efficiency of an inlet changes with changes in cross
slope, longitudinal slope, total gutter flow, and, to a lesser extent, pavement rough-
ness. In mathematical form, efficiency, E, is defined by the following equation:

(6.16)

Where E = Inlet efficiency

Q = Total gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qi = Intercepted flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Flow that is not intercepted by an inlet is termed carryover or bypass and is defined as
follows:

(6.17)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-219

Drainage Inlet Design

Where Qb = Bypass flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

The interception capacity of all inlet configurations increases with increasing flow
rates, and inlet efficiency generally decreases with increasing flow rates. Factors
affecting gutter flow also affect inlet interception capacity. The depth of water next to
the curb is the major factor in the interception capacity of both grate inlets and curb-
opening inlets.

The interception capacity of a grate inlet depends on the amount of water flowing over
the grate, the size and configuration of the grate and the velocity of flow in the gutter.
The efficiency of a grate is dependent on the same factors and total flow in the gutter.

Interception capacity of a curb-opening inlet is largely dependent on flow depth at the

curb and curb opening length. Flow depth at the curb and consequently, curb opening
inlet interception capacity and efficiency, is increased by the use of a local gutter
depression at the curb-opening or a continuously depressed gutter to the proportion of
the total flow adjacent to the curb. Top slab supports placed flush with the curb line
can substantially reduce the interception capacity of curb openings.

Tests have shown that such supports reduce the effectiveness of openings downstream
of the support by as much as 50 percent and, if debris is caught at the support, inter-
ception by the downstream portion of the opening may be reduced to near zero. If
intermediate top slab supports are used, they should be recessed several inches from
the curb line and rounded in shape.

Slotted inlets function in essentially the same manner as curb opening inlets, i.e., as
weirs with flow entering from the side. Interception capacity is dependent on flow
depth and inlet length. Efficiency is dependent on flow depth, inlet length and total
gutter flow.

The interception capacity of an equal length combination inlet consisting of a grate

placed alongside a curb opening on a grade does not differ materially from that of a
grate only. Interception capacity and efficiency are dependent on the same factors
which affect grate capacity and efficiency. A combination inlet consisting of a curb
opening inlet placed upstream of a grate inlet has a capacity equal to that of the curb
opening length upstream of the grate plus that of the grate, taking into account the
reduced spread and depth of flow over the grate because of the interception by the
curb opening. This inlet configuration has the added advantage of intercepting debris
that might otherwise clog the grate and deflect water away from the inlet.

6-220 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Factors Affecting Inlet Interception Capacity in Sag Locations

Grate inlets in sag vertical curves operate as weirs for shallow ponding depths and as
orifices at greater depths. Between weir and orifice flow depths, a transition from weir
to orifice flow occurs. The perimeter and clear opening area of the grate and the depth
of water at the curb affect inlet capacity. The capacity at a given depth can be severely
affected if debris collects on the grate and reduces the effective perimeter or clear
opening area.

Curb-opening inlets operate as weirs in sag vertical curve locations up to a ponding

depth equal to the opening height. At depths above 1.4 times the opening height, the
inlet operates as an orifice and between these depths, transition between weir and
orifice flow occurs. The curb-opening height and length, and water depth at the curb
affect inlet capacity. At a given flow rate, the effective water depth at the curb can be
increased by the use of a continuously depressed gutter, by use of a locally depressed
curb opening, or by use of an increased cross slope, thus decreasing the width of
spread at the inlet.

Slotted inlets operate as weirs for depths below approximately 50 mm (2 in) and
orifices in locations where the depth at the upstream edge of the slot is greater than
about 120 mm (5 in). Transition flow exists between these depths. For orifice flow, an
empirical equation derived from experimental data can be used to compute intercep-
tion capacity. Interception capacity varies with flow depth, slope, width, and length at
a given spread. Slotted drains are not recommended in sag locations because they are
susceptible to clogging from debris.

Comparison of Interception Capacity of Inlets on Grade

In order to compare the interception capacity and efficiency of various inlets on grade,
it is necessary to fix two variables that affect capacity and efficiency and investigate
the effects of varying the other factor. Figure 6-11 shows a comparison of curb-
opening inlets, grates, and slotted drain inlets with gutter flow fixed at 0.09 m 3/s (3.2
ft3/sec.), cross slope fixed at 3 percent, and longitudinal slope varied up to 10 percent.
Conclusions drawn from an analysis of this figure are not necessarily transferable to
other flow rates or cross slopes, but some inferences can be drawn that are applicable
to other sets of conditions. Grate configurations used for interception capacity
comparisons in this figure are described in “Inlet Capacity” on page 6-212.

Figure 6-11 illustrates the effects of flow depth at the curb and curb-opening length on
curb opening inlet interception capacity and efficiency. All of the slotted inlets and
curb opening inlets shown in the figure lose interception capacity and efficiency as the
longitudinal slope is increased because spread on the pavement and depth at the curb
become smaller as velocity increases. It is accurate to conclude that curb opening inlet
interception capacity and efficiency would increase with steeper cross slopes. It is also

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-221

Drainage Inlet Design

accurate to conclude that interception capacity would increase and inlet efficiency
would decrease with increased flow rates. Long curb-opening and slotted inlets
compare favorably with grates in interception capacity and efficiency for conditions
illustrated in Figure 6-11.

The effect of depth at the curb is also illustrated by a comparison of the interception
capacity and efficiency of depressed and undepressed curb-opening inlets. A 1.5 m (5
ft) depressed curb-opening inlet has about 67 percent more interception capacity than
an undepressed inlet at 2 percent slope, 3 percent cross slope, and 0.085 m 3/s (3 ft3/
sec.) gutter flow, and about 79 percent more interception capacity at an 8 percent
slope.

At low velocities, all of the water flowing in the section of gutter occupied by the
grate, called frontal flow, is intercepted by grate inlets. Only a small portion of the
flow outside of the grate, termed side flow, is intercepted. When the longitudinal slope
is increased, water begins to skip or splash over the grate at velocities dependent on
the grate configuration. Figure 6-11 shows that interception capacity and efficiency
are reduced at slopes steeper than the slope at which splash-over begins. Splash-over
for the less efficient grates begins at the slope at which the interception capacity curve
begins to deviate from the curve of the more efficient grates. All of the 0.6 m by 0.6 m
(2 ft by 2 ft) grates have equal interception capacity and efficiency at a flow rate of
0.085 m3/s (3 ft3/sec.), cross slope of 3 percent, and longitudinal slope of 2 percent. At
slopes steeper than 2 percent, splash-over occurs on the reticuline grate and the inter-
ception capacity is reduced. At a slope of 6 percent, velocities are such that splash-
over occurs on all except the curved vane and parallel bar grates. From these perfor-
mance characteristics curves, it can be concluded that parallel-bar grates and the
curved vane grate are relatively efficient at higher velocities and the reticuline grate is
least efficient. At low velocities, the grates perform equally. However, some of the
grates such as the reticuline grate are more susceptible to clogging by debris than the
parallel bar grate.

6-222 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figure 6-11: Comparison of Inlet Interception Capacity, Slope Variable

The capacity and efficiency of grates increase with increased slope and velocity if
splash-over does not occur. This is because frontal flow increases with increased
velocity, and all frontal flow will be intercepted if splash-over does not occur.

Figure 6-11 also illustrates that interception by longer grates would not be substan-
tially greater than interception by 0.6 m by 0.6 m (2 ft by 2 ft) grates. In order to
capture more of the flow, wider grates would be needed.

Figure 6-12 can be used for further study and comparisons of inlet interception
capacity and efficiency. It shows, for example, that at a 6 percent slope, splash-over
begins at about 0.02 m3/s (0.7 ft3/sec.) on a reticuline grate. It also illustrates that the
interception capacity of all inlets increases and inlet efficiency decreases with
increased discharge.

This comparison of inlet interception capacity and efficiency neglects the effects of
debris and clogging on the various inlets. All types of inlets, including curb-opening
inlets, are subject to clogging, some being more susceptible than others. Attempts to
simulate clogging tendencies in the laboratory have not been notably successful,

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-223

Drainage Inlet Design

except to demonstrate the importance of parallel bar spacing in debris handling effi-
ciency. Grates with wider spacings of longitudinal bars pass debris more efficiently.
Except for reticuline grates, grates with lateral bar spacing of less than 0.1 m (4 in)
were not tested so conclusions cannot be drawn from tests concerning debris handling
capabilities of many grates currently in use.

Problems with clogging are largely local since the amount of debris varies signifi-
cantly from one locality to another. Some localities must contend with only a small
amount of debris while others experience extensive clogging of drainage inlets. Since
partial clogging of inlets on grade rarely causes major problems, allowances should
not be made for reduction in inlet interception capacity except where local experience
indicates an allowance is advisable.

Figure 6-12: Comparison of Inlet Interception Capacity, Flow Rate

Variable

6-224 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.4.4 Interception Capacity of Inlets on Grade

The interception capacity of inlets on grade is dependent on factors discussed in

“Interception Capacity of Inlets on Grade” on page 6-225. In this section, design
charts for inlets on grade and procedures for using the charts are presented for the
various inlet configurations. Remember that for locally depressed inlets, the quantity
of flow reaching the inlet would be dependent on the upstream gutter section geom-
etry and not the depressed section geometry.

Charts for grate inlet interception have been made and are applicable to all grate inlets
tested for the Federal Highway Administration. The chart for frontal flow interception
is based on test results, which show that grates intercept all of the frontal flow until a
velocity is reached at which water begins to splash over the grate. At velocities greater
than splash-over velocity, grate efficiency in intercepting frontal flow is diminished.
Grates also intercept a portion of the flow along the length of the grate, or the side
flow. A chart is provided to determine side-flow interception.

One set of charts is provided for slotted inlets and curb-opening inlets, because these
inlets are both side-flow weirs. The equation developed for determining the length of
inlet required for total interception fits the test data for both types of inlets.

A procedure for determining the interception capacity of combination inlets is also

presented.

Grate Inlets
Grates are effective highway pavement drainage inlets where clogging with debris is
not a problem. Where clogging may be a problem, see Table 6-5 where grates are
ranked for susceptibility to clogging based on laboratory tests using simulated leaves.
This table should be used for relative comparisons only.

When the velocity approaching the grate is less than the splash-over velocity, the grate
will intercept essentially all of the frontal flow. Conversely, when the gutter flow
velocity exceeds the splash-over velocity for the grate, only part of the flow will be
intercepted. A part of the flow along the side of the grate will be intercepted, depen-
dent on the cross slope of the pavement, the length of the grate, and flow velocity.

(6.18)

The ratio of frontal flow to total gutter flow, Eo, for a uniform cross slope is expressed
by Equation 6.18:

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-225

Drainage Inlet Design

Where Q = Total gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Qw = Flow in width, W (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
W = Width of depressed gutter or grate (m, ft)
T = Total spread of water (m, ft)

Example 6-2 and Chart 2 provide solutions of Eo for either uniform cross slopes or
composite gutter sections.

The ratio of side flow, Qs, to total gutter flow is:

(6.19)

The ratio of frontal flow intercepted to total frontal flow, Rf, is expressed by Equation
6.20:

(6.20)

Where Kc = 0.295

V = Velocity of flow in gutter (m/sec., ft/sec.)

Vo = Gutter velocity where splash-over first occurs (m/
sec., ft/sec.)

Note: Rf cannot exceed 1.0.

6-226 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Table 6-5: Average Debris Handling Efficiencies of Grates Tested

Rank Grate Longitudinal Slope

0.005 0.040

1 Curved Vane 45 61

2 30 – 85 deg. 44 55
Tilt Bar

3 45 – 85 deg. 43 48
Tilt Bar

4 P-50 32 32

5 P-50x100 18 28

6 45 – 60 deg. 16 23
Tilt Bar

7 Reticuline 12 16

8 P-30 9 20

This ratio is equivalent to frontal flow interception efficiency. Chart 5 provides a solu-
tion for Equation 6.20, which takes into account grate length, bar configuration, and
gutter velocity at which splash-over occurs. The average gutter velocity (total gutter
flow divided by the area of flow) is needed to use Chart 5. This velocity can also be
obtained from Chart 4.

The ratio of side flow intercepted to total side flow, Rs, or side flow interception effi-
ciency, is expressed by Equation 6.21:

(6.21)

Where Kc = 0.0828 SI, 0.15 U.S. customary

Chart 6 provides a solution to Equation 6.21.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-227

Drainage Inlet Design

A deficiency in developing empirical equations and charts from experimental data is

evident in Chart 6. The fact that a grate will intercept all or almost all of the side flow
where the velocity is low and the spread only slightly exceeds the grate width is not
reflected in the chart. Error due to this deficiency is very small. In fact, where veloci-
ties are high, side flow interception may be neglected without significant error.

The efficiency, E, of a grate is expressed as provided in Equation 6.22:

(6.22)

The first term on the right side of Equation 6.22 is the ratio of intercepted frontal flow
to total gutter flow, and the second term is the ratio of intercepted side flow to total
side flow. The second term is insignificant with high velocities and short grates.

The interception capacity of a grate inlet on grade is equal to the efficiency of the grate
multiplied by the total gutter flow:

(6.23)

The use of Charts 5 and 6 are illustrated in the following examples.

6-228 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

EXAMPLE 6-7

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-229

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-8

6-230 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

The following table summarizes the results:

Table 6-6: Example 6-8 Results

Grate Size (width Frontal Side Flow Interception

by length) Flow Efficiency Capacity
Efficiency (Rs)
(Rf)

P-50 0.6m by 0.6m 1.0 0.036 0.091 cubic m/s

(2.0ft by 2.0ft) (3.2 ft3/sec.)

Reticuline 0.6m by 0.6m 0.9 0.036 0.082 cubic m/s

(2.0ft by 2.0ft) (2.89 ft3/sec.)

P-50 0.6m by 1.2m 1.0 0.155 0.103 cubic m/s

(2.0ft by 4.0ft) (3.63 ft3/sec.)

Reticuline 0.6m by 1.2m 1.0 0.155 0.103 cubic m/s

(2.0ft by 4.0ft) (3.63 ft3/sec.)

The P-50 parallel bar grate will intercept about 14 percent more flow than the reticu-
line grate or 48 percent of the total flow as opposed to 42 percent for the reticuline
grate. Increasing the length of the grates would not be cost-effective because the
increase in side flow interception is small.

Curb-Opening Inlets
Curb-opening inlets are effective in the drainage of highway pavements where flow
depth at the curb is sufficient for the inlet to perform efficiently. Curb openings are
less susceptible to clogging and offer little interference to traffic operation. They are a
viable alternative to grates on flatter grades where grates would be in traffic lanes or
would be hazardous for pedestrians or bicyclists.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-231

Drainage Inlet Design

Curb opening heights vary in dimension; however, a typical maximum height is

approximately 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 in). The length of the curb-opening inlet
required for total interception of gutter flow on a pavement section with a uniform
cross slope is expressed by Equation 6.24:

(6.24)

Where Kc = 0.817 SI, 0.6 U.S. customary

LT = Curb opening length required to intercept 100% of

gutter flow (m, ft)
SL = Longitudinal slope

Q = Gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

The efficiency of curb opening inlets shorter than the length required for total inter-
ception is expressed by Equation 6.25:

(6.25)

Where L = Curb opening length (m, ft)

Figure 6-13: Depressed Curb-Opening Inlet

Chart 7 is a nomograph for the solution of Equation 6.24, and Chart 8 provides a solu-
tion of Equation 6.25.

6-232 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

The length of inlet required for total interception by depressed curb-opening inlets or
curb-openings in depressed gutter sections can be found by the use of an equivalent
cross slope, Se, in Equation 6.24 in place of Sx. Se can be computed using Equation
6.26.

(6.26)

Where S'W = Cross-slope of the gutter measured from the cross-

slope of the pavement, Sx (m/m, ft/ft)

S'w = a/[1000W],(a/[12w]) (m, ft)

a = Gutter depression (mm, in)

Eo = Ratio of flow in the depressed section to total
gutter flow determined by gutter configuration
upstream of inlet

Figure 6-13 shows the depressed curb inlet for Equation 6.26. Eo is the same ratio as
used to compute the frontal flow interception of a grate inlet.

As seen from Chart 7, the length of curb opening required for total interception can be
significantly reduced by increasing the cross slope or the equivalent cross slope. The
equivalent cross slope can be increased by use of a continuously depressed gutter
section or a locally depressed gutter section.

Using the equivalent cross slope, Se, Equation 6.24 becomes:

(6.27)

Where KT = 0.817 SI, 0.6 U.S. customary

Equation 6.25 is applicable with either straight cross slopes or composite cross slopes.
Charts 7 and 8 are applicable to depressed curb-opening inlets using Se rather than Sx.

Equation 6.26 uses the ratio, Eo, in the computation of the equivalent cross slope, Se.
Example 6-9 demonstrates the procedure to determine spread and then the example
uses Chart 2 to determine Eo.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-233

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-9

6-234 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-235

Drainage Inlet Design

Slotted Inlets
Wide experience with the debris handling capabilities of slotted inlets is not available.
Deposition in the pipe is the problem most commonly encountered. The configuration
of slotted inlets makes them accessible for cleaning with a high pressure water jet.

Figure 6-14: Slotted Drain Inlet at an Intersection

Slotted inlets are effective pavement drainage inlets, which have a variety of applica-
tions. They can be used on curbed or uncurbed sections and offer little interference to
traffic operations. An installation is illustrated in Figure 6-14.

6-236 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Flow interception by slotted inlets and curb-opening inlets is similar in that each is a
side weir and the flow is subjected to lateral acceleration due to the cross slope of the
pavement. Analysis of data from the Federal Highway Administration tests of slotted
inlets with slot widths  45 mm (1.75 in) indicates that the length of slotted inlet
required for total interception can be computed by Equation 6.24. Chart 7, is therefore
applicable for both curb-opening inlets and slotted inlets. Similarly, Equation 6.25 is
also applicable to slotted inlets and Chart 8 can be used to obtain the inlet efficiency
for the selected length of inlet.

Use Charts 7 and 8 for slotted inlets the same way you would for curb-opening inlets.
Additional examples to demonstrate the use of the charts are not provided here for that
reason. It should be noted, however, that it is much less expensive to add length to an
existing slotted inlet to increase interception capacity than it is to add length to an
existing curb-opening inlet.

Combination Inlets

Figure 6-15: Combination Curb-Opening, 45-Degree Tilt-Bar Grate Inlet

The interception capacity of a combination inlet consisting of a curb opening and

grate placed side-by-side, as shown in Figure 6-15, is no greater than that of the grate
alone. Capacity is computed by neglecting the curb opening. A combination inlet is
sometimes used with a part of the curb opening placed upstream of the grate as illus-
trated in Figure 6-16. The curb opening in such an installation intercepts debris, which

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-237

Drainage Inlet Design

might otherwise clog the grate and is called a sweeper inlet. A sweeper combination
inlet has an interception capacity equal to the sum of the curb opening upstream of the
grate plus the grate capacity, except that the frontal flow and thus the interception
capacity of the grate is reduced by interception by the curb opening.

Figure 6-16: Sweeper Combination Inlet

The following example illustrates computation of the interception capacity of a

combination curb-opening grate inlet with a portion of the curb opening upstream of
the grate.

6-238 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

EXAMPLE 6-10

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-239

Drainage Inlet Design

The use of depressed inlets and combination inlets enhances the interception capacity
of the inlet. Example 6-7 determined the interception capacity of a depressed curved
vane grate, 0.6 m by 0.6 m (2 ft by 2 ft), Example 6-9 for an undepressed curb opening
inlet, length = 3.0 m (9.8 ft) and a depressed curb opening inlet, length = 3.0 m (9.8
ft), and Example 6-10 for a combination of 0.6 m by 0.6 m (2 ft by 2 ft) depressed

6-240 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

curve vane grate located at the downstream end of 3.0 m (9.8 ft) long depressed curb
opening inlet. The geometries of the inlets and the gutter slopes were consistent in the
examples and Table 6-7 summarizes a comparison of the intercepted flow of the
various configurations.

Table 6-7: Comparison of Inlet Interception Capabilities

Inlet Type Intercepted Flow, Qi

Curved Vane—Depressed 0.033 cubic m/s (1.2 ft3/sec.)

(Example 6-7)

Curb Opening—Undepressed 0.031 cubic m/s (1.1 ft3/sec.)

(Example 6-9)

Curb Opening—Depressed 0.045 cubic m/s (1.59 ft3/sec.)

(Example 6-9)

Combination Inlet (Curved 0.050 cubic m/s (1.76 ft3/sec.)

Vane and Curb Opening)— (Example 6-10)
Depressed

From Table 6-7, it can be seen that the combination inlet intercepted approximately
100% of the total flow whereas the curved vane grate alone only intercepted 66% of
the total flow. The depressed curb opening intercepted 90% of the total flow.
However, if the curb opening was undepressed, it would have only intercepted 62% of
the total flow.

6.4.5 Interception Capacity of Inlets in Sag Locations

Inlets in sag locations operate as weirs under low head conditions and as orifices at
greater depths. Orifice flow begins at depths dependent on the grate size, the curb
opening height, or the slot width of the inlet. At depths between those at which weir
flow definitely prevails and those at which orifice flow prevails, flow is in a transition
stage. At these depths, control is ill-defined and flow may fluctuate between weir and
orifice control. Design procedures presented here are based on a conservative
approach to estimating the capacity of inlets in sump locations.

The efficiency of inlets in passing debris is critical in sag locations because all runoff
which enters the sag must be passed through the inlet. Total or partial clogging of
inlets in these locations can result in hazardous ponded conditions. Grate inlets alone
are not recommended for use in sag locations because of the tendencies of grates to
become clogged. Combination inlets or curb-opening inlets are recommended for use
in these locations.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-241

Drainage Inlet Design

Grate Inlets
A grate inlet in a sag location operates as a weir to depths dependent on the bar config-
uration and size of the grate and as an orifice at greater depths. Grates of larger dimen-
sion will operate as weirs to greater depths than smaller grates or grates with less
opening area.

The capacity of grate inlets operating as weirs is:

(6.28)

Where W = Width of the grate (m, ft)

CW = 1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary

d1 = Flow depth at middle of grate(m, ft)

d2 = Flow depth at side of grate opposite the curb (m,
ft)

The capacity of a grate inlet operating as an orifice is:

(6.29)

Where Co = Orifice coefficient 0.67

Ag = Clear opening of the grate (m2, ft2)

g = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/
sec.2)

Use of Equation 6.29 requires the clear area of opening of the grate. Tests of three
grates for the Federal Highway Administration showed that for flat bar grates, such as
the P-50x100 and P-30 grates, the clear opening is equal to the total area of the grate
less the area occupied by longitudinal and lateral bars. The curved vane grate
performed about 10 percent better than a grate with a net opening equal to the total
area less the area of the bars projected on a horizontal plane. That is, the projected area
of the bars in a curved vane grate is 68 percent of the total area of the grate leaving a
net opening of 32 percent, however the grate performed as a grate with a net opening
of 35 percent. Tilt-bar grates were not tested, but exploration of the above results
would indicate a net opening area of 34 percent for the 30-degree tiltbar and zero for

6-242 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

the 45-degree tilt-bar grate. Obviously, the 45-degree tilt-bar grate would have greater
than zero capacity. Tilt-bar and curved vane grates are not recommended for sump
locations where there is a chance that operation would be as an orifice. Opening ratios
for the grates are given on Chart 9.

Chart 9 is a plot of Equations 6.28 and 6.29 for various grate sizes. The effects of grate
size on the depth at which a grate operates as an orifice is apparent from the chart.
Transition from weir to orifice flow results in interception capacity less than that
computed by either the weir or the orifice equation; this capacity can be approximated
by drawing in a curve between the lines representing the perimeter and net area of the
grate to be used.

Example 6-11 illustrates use of Equations 6.28 and 6.29 and Chart 9.

EXAMPLE 6-11

Some assumptions must be made regarding the nature of the clogging in order to
compute the capacity of a partially clogged grate. If the area of a grate is 50 percent
covered by debris so that the debris-covered portion does not contribute to intercep-
tion, the effective perimeter will be reduced by a lesser amount than 50 percent. For
example, if a 0.6 m by 1.2 m (2 ft by 4 ft) grate is clogged so that the effective width is
0.3 m (1 ft), then the perimeter, P = 0.3 + 1.2 + 0.3 = 1.8 m (6 ft), rather than 2.4 m (8

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-243

Drainage Inlet Design

ft), the total perimeter, or 1.2 m (4 ft), half of the total perimeter. The area of the
opening would be reduced by 50 percent and the perimeter by 25 percent. Therefore,
assuming 50 percent clogging along the length of the grate, a 1.2 m by 1.2 m (4 ft by 4
ft), 0.6 m by 1.8 m (2 ft by 6 ft), or a .9 m by 1.5 m (3 ft by 5 ft) grate would meet
requirements of a 2.4 m (8 ft) perimeter 50 percent clogged.

Conclusion:

A double 0.6 m by 0.9 m (2 ft by 3 ft) grate 50 percent clogged is adequate to intercept

the design storm flow at a spread, which does not exceed design spread. However, the
tendency of grate inlets to clog completely warrants consideration of a combination
inlet or curb-opening inlet in a sag where ponding can occur, and flanking inlets on the
low gradient approaches.

Curb-Opening Inlets
The capacity of a curb-opening inlet in a sag depends on water depth at the curb, the
curb opening length, and the height of the curb opening. The inlet operates as a weir to
depths equal to the curb opening height and as an orifice at depths greater than 1.4
times the opening height. At depths between 1.0 and 1.4 times the opening height,
flow is in a transition stage.

Spread on the pavement is the usual criterion for judging the adequacy of a pavement
drainage inlet design. It is also convenient and practical in the laboratory to measure
depth at the curb upstream of the inlet at the point of maximum spread on the pave-
ment. Therefore, depths at the curb measurements from experiments coincide with the

6-244 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

depth at curb of interest to designers. The weir coefficient for a curb opening inlet is
less than the usual weir coefficient for several reasons, the most obvious of which is
that depth measurements from experimental tests were not taken at the weir, and draw-
down occurs between the point where measurement were made and the weir.

The weir location for a depressed curb-opening inlet is at the edge of the gutter, and
the effective weir length is dependent on the width of the depressed gutter and the
length of the curb opening. The weir location for a curb-opening inlet that is not
depressed is at the lip of the curb opening, and its length is equal to that of the inlet, as
shown in Chart 10.

The equation for the interception capacity of a depressed curb-opening inlet operating
as a weir is:

(6.30)

Where Cw = 1.25 SI, 2.3 U.S. customary

L = Length of curb opening (m, ft)

W = Lateral width of depression (m, ft)
d = Depth at curb, measured from the normal cross-
slope—d = TSx (m, ft)

The weir equation is applicable to depths at the curb approximately equal to the height
of the opening plus the depth of the depression. Thus, the limitation on the use of
Equation 6.30 for a depressed curb-opening inlet is:

(6.31)

Where h = Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)

a = Depth of depression (mm, in)

Experiments have not been conducted for curb-opening inlets with a continuously
depressed gutter, but it is reasonable to expect that the effective weir length would be
as great as that for an inlet in a local depression. Use of Equation 6.30 will yield
conservative estimates of the interception capacity.

The weir equation for curb-opening inlets without depression becomes:

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-245

Drainage Inlet Design

(6.32)

Without depression of the gutter section, the weir coefficient, Cw, becomes 1.60 (3.0,
U.S. customary system). The depth limitation for operation as a weir becomes dh.

At curb-opening lengths greater than 3.6m (12 ft), Equation 6.32 for non-depressed
inlet produces intercepted flows which exceed the values for depressed inlets
computed using Equation 6.30. Since depressed inlets will perform at least as well as
non-depressed inlets of the same length, Equation 6.32 should be used for all curb
opening inlets having lengths greater than 3.6 m (12 ft).

Curb-opening inlets operate as orifices at depths greater than approximately 1.4 times
the opening height. The interception capacity can be computed by Equation 6.33 and
Equation 6.34. These equations are applicable to depressed and undepressed curb-
opening inlets. The depth at the inlet includes any gutter depression.

(6.33)

Or

(6.34)

Where Co = Orifice coefficient 0.67

do = Effective head on the center of the orifice throat

(m, ft)
L = Length of the orifice opening (m, ft)
Ag = Clear area of the opening (m2, ft2)
di = Depth at lip of curb opening (m, ft)

h = Height of curb opening orifice (m, ft)

h = TSx + a (a/12 U.S. customary)

The height of the orifice in Equations 6.33 and 6.34 assumes a vertical orifice
opening. As illustrated in Figure 6-17, other orifice throat locations can change the
effective depth on the orifice and the dimension (di – h/2). A limited throat width
could reduce the capacity of the curb-opening inlet by causing the inlet to go into
orifice flow at depths less than the height of the opening.

6-246 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

For curb-opening inlets with other than vertical faces (see Figure 6-17), Equation 6.33
can be used with:

Where h = Orifice throat width (m, ft)

do = Effective head on the center of the orifice throat

Figure 6-17: Curb Opening Inlets

Chart 10 provides solutions for Equations 6.30 and 6.33 for depressed curb-opening
inlets, and Chart 11 provides solutions for Equations 6.32 and 6.33 for curb-opening
inlets without depression. Chart 12 is provided for use for curb openings with other
than vertical orifice openings.

Example 6-12 illustrates the use of Charts 11 and 12.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-247

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-12

6-248 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Slotted Inlets

Slotted inlets in sag locations perform as weirs to depths of about 0.06 m (0.2 ft),
dependent on slot width. At depths greater than about 0.12 m, (0.4 ft), they perform as
orifices. Between these depths, flow is in a transition stage. The interception capacity
of a slotted inlet operating as a weir can be computed by an equation of the form:

(6.35)

Where Cw = Weir coefficient that varies with flow depth and

slot length (typically 1.4 SI and 2.48 U.S.
customary)
L = Length of slot (m, ft)
d = Depth at curb measured from the normal cross-
slope (m, ft)

The interception capacity of a slotted inlet operating as an orifice can be computed by

Equation 6.36:

(6.36)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-249

Drainage Inlet Design

Where W = Width of slot (m, ft)

L = Length of slot (m, ft)
d = Depth of water at slot for d  0.12 m or d  0.4 ft
g = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/
sec.2)

For a slot width of 45 mm (1.75 in), Equation 6.36 becomes:

(6.37)

Chart 13 provides solutions for weir and orifice flow conditions as represented by
Equations 6.35 and 6.36. As indicated in Chart 13, the transition between weir and
orifice flow occurs at different depths. To conservatively compute the interception
capacity of slotted inlets in sump conditions in the transition area, original conditions
should be assumed. Due to clogging characteristics, slotted drains are not recom-
mended in sag locations.

EXAMPLE 6-13

6-250 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Combination Inlets
Combination inlets consisting of a grate and a curb opening are considered advisable
for use in sags where hazardous ponding can occur. Equal length inlets refer to a grate
inlet placed along side a curb-opening inlet, both of which have the same length. A
sweeper inlet refers to a grate inlet placed at the downstream end of a curb-opening
inlet. The curb-opening inlet is longer than the grate inlet and intercepts the flow
before the flow reaches the grate. The sweeper inlet is more efficient than the equal
length combination inlet and the curb opening has the ability to intercept any debris,
which may clog the grate inlet. The interception capacity of the equal length combina-
tion inlet is essentially equal to that of a grate alone in weir flow. In orifice flow, the
capacity of the equal length combination inlet is equal to the capacity of the grate plus
the capacity of the curb opening.

Equation 6.28 and Chart 9 can be used for weir flow in combination inlets in sag loca-
tions. Assuming complete clogging of the grate, Equations 6.30, 6.32, and 6.33 and
Charts 10, 11 and 12 for curb-opening inlets are applicable.

Where depth at the curb is such that orifice flow occurs, the interception capacity of
the inlet is computed by adding Equations 6.29 and 6.34 as follows:

(6.38)

Where Ag = Clear area of the grate (m2, ft2)

g = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/
sec.2)
d = Depth at the curb (m, ft)
h = Height of the curb-opening orifice (m, ft)
L = Length of the curb opening (m, ft)
do = Effective depth at the center of the curb-opening
orifice (m, ft)

Trial and error solutions are necessary for determining the depth at the curb for a
given flow rate using Charts 9, 10, and 11 for orifice flow. Different assumptions for
clogging of the grate can also be examined using these charts as illustrated by
Example 6-14.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-251

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-14

6-252 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.4.6 Inlet Locations

The location of inlets is determined by geometric controls which require inlets at

specific locations, the use and location of flanking inlets in sag vertical curves, and the
criterion of spread on the pavement. In order to adequately design the location of the
inlets for a given project, you need the following information:

• A layout or plan sheet suitable for outlining drainage areas

• Road profiles
• Typical cross sections
• Grading cross sections
• Superelevation diagrams
• Contour maps

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-253

Drainage Inlet Design

Geometric Controls
There are a number of locations where inlets may be necessary with little regard to
contributing drainage area. These locations should be marked on the plans prior to any
computations regarding discharge, water spread, inlet capacity, or flow bypass, as
described in the following examples:

• At all low points in the gutter grade

• Immediately upstream of median breaks, entrance/exit ramp gores, cross walks,
and street intersections (i.e. at any location where water could flow onto the trav-
elway)
• Immediately upgrade of bridges (to prevent pavement drainage from flowing onto
bridge deck)
• Immediately downstream of bridges (to intercept bridge deck drainage)
• Immediately up grade of cross slope reversals
• Immediately up grade from pedestrian cross walks
• At the end of channels in cut sections
• On side streets immediately up grade from intersections
• Behind curbs, shoulders or sidewalks to drain low areas

In addition to the areas identified above, runoff from areas draining towards the
highway pavement should be intercepted by roadside channels or inlets before it
reaches the roadway. This applies to drainage from cut slopes, side streets, and other
areas alongside the pavement. Curbed pavement sections and pavement drainage
inlets are inefficient means for handling extraneous drainage.

Inlet Spacing on Continuous Grades

Design spread is the criterion used for locating storm drain inlets between those
required by geometric or other controls. The interception capacity of the upstream
inlet will define the initial spread. As flow is contributed to the gutter section in the
downstream direction, spread increases. The next downstream inlet is located at the
point where the spread in the gutter reaches the design spread. Therefore, the spacing
of inlets on a continuous grade is a function of the amount of upstream bypass flow,
the tributary drainage area, and the gutter geometry.

For a continuous slope, the designer may establish the uniform design spacing
between inlets of a given design if the drainage area consists of pavement only or has
reasonably uniform runoff characteristics and is rectangular in shape. In this case, the
time of concentration is assumed to be the same for all inlets. The following procedure
and example illustrates the effects of inlet efficiency on inlet spacing.

6-254 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Use the computation sheet shown in Figure 6-18 and perform the steps in the
following procedure:

Step 1—Complete the blanks at the top of the sheet to identify the job by state project
number, route, date, and your initials.

Step 2—Mark on a plan the location of inlets which are necessary even without
considering any specific drainage area.

Step 3—Start at a high point, at one end of the job if possible, and work towards the
low point. Then begin at the next high point and work backwards toward the same low
point.

Step 4—To begin the process, select a trial drainage area approximately 90 m to 150
m (300 to 500 ft) long below the high point and outline the area on the plan. Include
any area that may drain over the curb, onto the roadway. However, where practical,
drainage from large areas behind the curb should be intercepted before it reaches the
roadway or gutter.

Step 5—(Col. 1, Col. 2, Col. 19) Describe the location of the proposed inlet by
number and station and record this information in columns 1 and 2. Identify the curb
and gutter type in column 19, Remarks. A sketch of the cross section should be
prepared.

Step 6—(Col. 3) Compute the drainage area (hectares) outlined in step 4 and record in
column 3.

Step 7—(Col. 4) Determine the runoff coefficient, C, for the drainage area.

Step 8—(Col. 5) Compute the time of concentration, tc, in minutes, for the first inlet
and record in column 5. The time of concentration is the time for the water to flow
from the most hydraulically remote point of the drainage area to the inlet. The
minimum time of concentration is 5 minutes.

Step 9—(Col. 6) Using the time of concentration, determine the rainfall intensity from
the Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) curve for the design frequency. Enter the
value in column 6.

Step 10—(Col. 7) Calculate the flow in the gutter using Q = CIA / Kc. The flow is
calculated by multiplying column 3 times column 4 times column 6 divided by Kc.
Using the SI system of units, Kc = 360 (= 1 for U.S. customary units). Enter the flow
value in column 7.

Step 11—(Col. 8) From the roadway profile, enter in column 8 the gutter longitudinal
slope, SL, at the inlet, taking into account any superelevation.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-255

Drainage Inlet Design

Step 12—(Col. 9, Col. 13) From the cross section, enter the cross slope, Sx, in column
9 and the grate or gutter width, W, in column 13.

Step 13—(Col. 11, Col. 10) For the first inlet in a series, enter the value from column
7 into column 11, since there was no previous bypass flow. Additionally, if the inlet is
the first in a series, enter 0 into column 10.

Step 14—(Col. 14, Col. 12) Determine the spread, T, by using Equations 6.2 and 6.4
or Charts 1 and 2 and enter the value in column 14. Also, determine the depth at the
curb, d, by multiplying the spread by the appropriate cross slope, and enter the value
in column 12. Compare the calculated spread with the allowable spread as determined
by the design criteria outlined in “Design Frequency and Spread” on page 6-184.
Additionally, compare the depth at the curb with the actual curb height in column 19.
If the calculated spread, column 14, is near the allowable spread and the depth at the
curb is less than the actual curb height, continue on to step 15. Else, expand or
decrease the drainage area up to the first inlet to increase or decrease the spread,
respectively. The drainage area can be expanded by increasing the length to the inlet
and it can be decreased by decreasing the distance to the inlet. Then, repeat steps 6
through 14 until appropriate values are obtained.

Step 15—(Col. 15) Calculate W/T and enter the value in column 15.

Step 16—(Col. 16) Select the inlet type and dimensions and enter the values in
column 16.

Step 17—(Col. 17) Calculate the flow intercepted the grate, Qi, and enter the value in
column 17. Use Equations 6.18 and 6.15 or Charts 2 and 4 to define the gutter flow.
Use Chart 5 and Equation 6.21 or Chart 6 to define the flow intercepted by the grate.
Use Equations 6.24 and 6.25 or Charts 7 and 8 for curb opening inlets. Finally, use
Equation 6.25 to determine the intercepted flow.

Step 18—(Col. 18) Determine the bypass flow, Qb, and enter into column 18. The
bypass flow is column 11 minus column 17.

Step 19—(Col. 1-4) Proceed to the next inlet down the grade. To begin the procedure,
select a drainage area approximately 90 m to 120 m (300 to 400 ft) below the previous
inlet for a first trial. Repeat steps 5 through 7 considering only the area between the
inlets.

Step 20—(Col. 5) Compute the time of concentration for the next inlet based upon the
area between the consecutive inlets and record this value in column 5.

Step 21—(Col. 6) Determine the rainfall intensity from the IDF curve based upon the
time of concentration determined in step 19 and record the value in column 6.

Step 22—(Col. 7) Determine the flow in the gutter and record the value in column 7.

6-256 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Step 23—(Col. 11) Record the value from column 18 of the previous line into column
10 of the current line. Determine the total gutter flow by adding column 7 and column
10 and record in column 11.

Step 24—(Col. 12, Col. 14) Determine the spread and the depth at the curb as outlined
in step 14. Repeat steps 18 through 24 until the spread and the depth at the curb are
within the design criteria.

Step 25—(Col. 16) Select the inlet type and record in column 16.

Step 26—(Col. 17) Determine the intercepted flow in accordance with step 17.

Step 27—(Col. 18) Calculate the bypass flow by subtracting column 17 from column
11. This completes the spacing design for the inlet.

Step 28—Repeat steps 19 through 27 for each subsequent inlet down to the low point.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-257

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-18: Inlet Spacing Computation Sheet

6-258 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Figure 6-19: Storm Drainage System for Example 6-15

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-259

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-15

6-260 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-261

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-20: Inlet Spacing Computation Sheet

6-262 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-263

Drainage Inlet Design

For inlet spacing in areas with changing grades, the spacing will vary as the grade
changes. If the grade becomes flatter, inlets may be spaced at closer intervals because
the spread will exceed the allowable. Conversely, for an increase in slope, the inlet
spacing will become longer because of increased capacity in the gutter sections. Addi-
tionally, individual transportation agencies may have limitations for spacing due to
maintenance constraints.

Flanking Inlets

Figure 6-21: Example of Flanking Inlet

As discussed in the previous section, inlets should always be located at the low or sag
points in the gutter profile. In addition, it is good engineering practice to place
flanking inlets on each side of the low point inlet when in a depressed area that has no
outlet except through the system. This is illustrated in Figure 6-21. The purpose of the
flanking inlets is to act in relief of the inlet at the low point if it should become
clogged or if the design spread is exceeded. Flanking inlets can be located so they will
function before water spread exceeds the allowable spread at the sump location.

The flanking inlets should be located so that they will receive all of the flow when the
primary inlet at the bottom of the sag is clogged. They should do this without
exceeding the allowable spread at the bottom of the sag. If the flanking inlets are the
same dimension as the primary inlet, they will each intercept one-half the design flow
when they are located so that the depth of ponding at the flanking inlets is 63 percent
of the depth of ponding at the low point. If the flanker inlets are not the same size as
the primary inlet, it will be necessary to either develop a new factor or do a trial and
error solution using assumed depths with the weir equation to determine the capacity
of the flanker inlet at the given depths.

Table 6-8 shows the spacing required for various depth at curb criteria and vertical
curve lengths defined by K = L / (G2 – G1), where L is the length of the vertical curve
in meters and G1 and G2 are the approach grades. The AASHTO policy on geometrics
specifies maximum K values for various design speeds and a maximum K of 50
considering drainage. The use of table 6-8 is illustrated in Example 6-16.

6-264 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Table 6-8: Distance to Flanking Inlets in Sag Vertical Curve using Depth at
Curb Criteria

d(m) 4 8 11 15 20 25 30 37 43 50

0.01 2.8 4.0 4.7 5.5 6.3 7.1 7.7 8.6 9.3 10.0

0.02 4.0 5.7 6.6 7.7 8.9 10.0 11.0 12.2 13.1 14.1

0.03 4.9 7.0 8.2 9.6 11.0 12.3 13.5 15.0 16.2 17.5

0.06 7.0 9.9 11.6 13.5 15.6 17.5 19.1 12.2 22.9 24.7

0.09 8.6 12.1 14.2 16.6 19.1 21.4 23.4 26.0 28.0 30.2

0.12 9.9 14.0 16.4 19.1 22.1 24.7 27.1 30.0 32.4 34.9

0.15 11.0 15.6 18.3 21.4 24.7 27.6 30.2 33.6 36.2 39.0

0.18 12.1 17.1 20.1 23.4 27.1 30.2 33.1 36.8 39.7 42.8

0.21 13.1 18.5 21.7 25.3 29.2 32.7 35.8 39.7 42.8 46.2

0.24 14.0 19.8 23.2 27.1 31.2 34.9 38.3 42.5 45.8 49.4

• 1. x = (200dK) 0.5, where x = distance from sag point

• 2. d = depth at curb in meters (does not include sump depth)

• 3. drainage maximum K = 50

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-265

Drainage Inlet Design

EXAMPLE 6-16

Example problem solutions in “Interception Capacity of Inlets in Sag Locations” on

page 6-241 illustrate the total interception capacity of inlets in sag locations. Except
where inlets become clogged, spread on low gradient approaches to the low point is a
more stringent criterion for design than the interception capacity of the sag inlet.
AASHTO recommends that a gradient of 0.3 percent be maintained within 15 m (50
ft) of the level point in order to provide for adequate drainage. It is considered advis-
able to use spread on the pavement at a gradient comparable to that recommended by
the AASHTO Committee on Design to evaluate the location and design of inlets
upgrade of sag vertical curves. Standard inlet locations may need to be adjusted to
avoid excessive spread in the sag curve. Inlets may be needed between the flankers
and the ends of the curves also. For major sag points, the flanking inlets are added as a
safety factor, and are not considered as intercepting flow to reduce the bypass flow to
the sag point. They are installed to assist the sag point inlet in the event of clogging.

6-266 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

6.4.7 Median, Embankment, and Bridge Inlets

Flow in median and roadside ditches is discussed briefly in “Bentley FlowMaster

Theory” on page 5-129 and in Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 15 and Hydraulic
Design Series No. 4. It is sometimes necessary to place inlets in medians at intervals
to remove water that could cause erosion. Inlets are sometimes used in roadside
ditches at the intersection of cut and fill slopes to prevent erosion downstream of cut
sections.

Where adequate vegetative cover can be established on embankment slopes to prevent

erosion, it is preferable to allow storm water to discharge down the slope with as little
concentration of flow as practicable. Where storm water must be collected with curbs
or swales, inlets are used to receive the water and discharge it through chutes, sod or
riprap swales, or pipe downdrains.

Bridge deck drainage is similar to roadway drainage and deck drainage inlets are
similar in purpose to roadway inlets. Bridge deck drainage is discussed in greater
detail in Design of Bridge Deck Drainage, published in 1993 by the Federal Highway
Administration.

Median and Roadside Ditch Inlets

Median and roadside ditches may be drained by drop inlets similar to those used for
pavement drainage, by pipe culverts under one roadway, or by cross drainage culverts
which are not continuous across the median. Figure 6-22 illustrates a traffic-safe
median inlet. Inlets, pipes, and discontinuous cross drainage culverts should be
designed so as not to detract from a safe roadside. Drop inlets should be flush with the
ditch bottom and traffic-safe bar grates should be placed on the ends of pipes used to
drain medians that would be a hazard to errant vehicles, although this may cause a
plugging potential. Cross drainage structures should be continuous across the median
unless the median width makes this impractical. Ditches tend to erode at drop inlets;
paving around the inlets helps to prevent erosion and may increase the interception
capacity of the inlet marginally by acceleration of the flow.

Pipe drains for medians operate as culverts and generally require more water depth to
intercept median flow than drop inlets. No test results are available on which to base
design procedures for estimating the effects of placing grates on culvert inlets.
However, little effect is expected.

The interception capacity of drop inlets in median ditches on continuous grades can be
estimated by use of Charts 14 and 15 to estimate flow depth and the ratio of frontal
flow to total flow in the ditch.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-267

Drainage Inlet Design

Figure 6-22: Median Drop Inlet

Chart 14 is the solution to the Manning equation for channels of various side slopes.
The Manning equation for open channels is:

(6.39)

Where Q = Discharge rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

KM = 1.0 SI, 1.486 U.S. customary

n = Hydraulic resistance variable

A = Cross-sectional area of flow (m2, ft2)
R = Hydraulic radius—area/wetted perimeter (m, ft)
SL = Bed slope (m/m, ft/ft)

For the trapezoidal channel cross section shown on Chart 14, the Manning equation
becomes:

(6.40)

6-268 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Where B = Bottom width (m, ft)

z = Horizontal distance of side slope to a rise of 1 m
(ft) vertical (m, ft)

Equation 6.40 is a trial and error solution to Chart 14.

Chart 15 is the ratio of frontal flow to total flow in a trapezoidal channel. This is
expressed as:

(6.41)

Charts 5 and 6 are used to estimate the ratios of frontal and side flow intercepted by
the grate to total flow.

Small dikes downstream of drop inlets (Figure 6-22) can be provided to impede
bypass flow in an attempt to cause complete interception of the approach flow. The
dikes usually need not be more than a few inches high and should have traffic safe
slopes. The height of dike required for complete interception on continuous grades or
the depth of ponding in sag vertical curves can be computed by use of Chart 9. The
effective perimeter of a grate in an open channel with a dike should be taken as 2(L +
W), since one side of the grate is not adjacent to a curb.

Example 6-17 illustrates the use of Charts 14 and 15 for drop inlets in ditches on
continuous grade.

EXAMPLE 6-17

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-269

Drainage Inlet Design

6-270 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

In the preceding example, a P-50 inlet would intercept about 30 percent of the flow in
a 1.2 m (4 ft) bottom ditch on continuous grade.

For grate widths equal to the bottom width of the ditch, use Chart 6 by substituting
ditch side slopes for values of Sx, as illustrated in Example 6-18.

EXAMPLE 6-18

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-271

Drainage Inlet Design

The height of dike downstream of a drop inlet required for total interception is illus-
trated by Example 6-19.

EXAMPLE 6-19

A dike will need to have a minimum height of 0.16 m (0.5 ft) for total interception.
Due to the initial velocity of the water which may provide adequate momentum to
carry the flow over the dike, an additional 0.15 m (0.5 ft) may be added to the height
of the dike to insure complete interception of the flow.

6-272 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Embankment Inlets
Drainage inlets are often needed to collect runoff from pavements in order to prevent
erosion of fill slopes or to intercept water upgrade or downgrade of bridges. Inlets
used at these locations differ from other pavement drainage inlets in three respects.
First, the economies which can be achieved by system design are often not possible
because a series of inlets is not used; second, total or near total interception is some-
times necessary in order to limit the bypass flow from running onto a bridge deck; and
third, a closed storm drainage system is often not available to dispose of the inter-
cepted flow, and the means for disposal must be provided at each inlet. Intercepted
flow is usually discharged into open chutes or pipe downdrains, which terminate at the
toe of the fill slope.

Figure 6-23: Embankment Inlet and Downdrain

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-273

Grate Type Selection Considerations

Example problem solutions in other sections of this circular illustrate by inference the
difficulty in providing for near total interception on grade. Grate inlets intercept little
more than the flow conveyed by the gutter width occupied by the grate. Combination
curb-opening and grate inlets can be designed to intercept total flow if the length of
curb opening upstream of the grate is sufficient to reduce spread in the gutter to the
width of the grate used. Depressing the curb opening would significantly reduce the
length of inlet required. Perhaps the most practical inlets or procedure for use where
near total interception is necessary are sweeper inlets, increase in grate width, and
slotted inlets of sufficient length to intercept 85-100 percent of the gutter flow. Design
charts and procedures in “Interception Capacity of Inlets on Grade” on page 6-225 are
applicable to the design of inlets on embankments. Figure 6-23 illustrates a combina-
tion inlet and downdrain.

Downdrains or chutes used to convey intercepted flow from inlets to the toe of the fill
slope may be open or closed chutes. Pipe downdrains are preferable because the flow
is confined and cannot cause erosion along the sides. Pipes can be covered to reduce
or eliminate interference with maintenance operations on the fill slopes. Open chutes
are often damaged by erosion from water splashing over the sides of the chute due to
oscillation in the flow and from spill over the sides at bends in the chute. Erosion at
the ends of downdrains or chutes can be a problem if not anticipated. The end of the
device may be placed low enough to prevent damage by undercutting due to erosion.
Well-graded gravel or rock can be used to control the potential for erosion at the outlet
of the structure. However, some transportation agencies install an elbow or a tee at the
end of the downdrains to re-direct the flow and prevent erosion. See HEC-14) for
additional information on energy dissipator designs.

6.5 Grate Type Selection Considerations

Grate type selection should consider such factors as hydraulic efficiency, debris
handling characteristics, pedestrian and bicycle safety, and loading conditions. Rela-
tive costs will also influence grate type selection.

Charts 5, 6, and 9 illustrate the relative hydraulic efficiencies of the various grate types
discussed here. The parallel bar grate (P-50) is hydraulically superior to all others but
is not considered bicycle safe. The curved vane and the P-30 grates have good
hydraulic characteristics with high velocity flows. The other grates tested are hydrau-
lically effective at lower velocities.

Debris-handling capabilities of various grates are reflected in Table 6-5. The table
shows a clear difference in efficiency between the grates with the 83 mm (3-1/4 inch)
longitudinal bar spacing and those with smaller spacings. The efficiencies shown in
the table are suitable for comparisons between the grate designs tested, but should not
be taken as an indication of field performance since the testing procedure used did not
simulate actual field conditions. Some local transportation agencies have developed
factors for use of debris handling characteristics with specific inlet configurations.

6-274 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Pavement Drainage

Table 6-9 ranks the grates according to relative bicycle and pedestrian safety. The
bicycle safety ratings were based on a subjective test program as described in

Hydraulic and Safety Characteristics of selected Grate Inlets on Continuous Grades

volumes 1 and 2, published by the FHWA in June 1977 and April 1978, respectively.
However, all the grates are considered bicycle and pedestrian safe except the P-50.

Grate loading conditions must also be considered when determining an appropriate

grate type. Grates in traffic areas must be able to withstand traffic loads; conversely,
grates draining yard areas do not generally need to be as rigid.

Table 6-9: Ranking with Respect to Bicycle and Pedestrian Safety

Rank Grate Style

1 P-50x100

2 Reticuline

3 P-30

4 45-85 deg. Tilt Bar

5 45-60 deg. Tilt Bar

6 Curved Vane

7 30-85 deg. Tilt Bar

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 6-275

Grate Type Selection Considerations

6-276 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Chapter

HEC 22 Charts 7
Chart 1A (S.I.) and 1B (U.S. customary)—Flow in triangular gutter sections

Chart 2A (S.I.) and 2B (U.S. customary)—Ratio of frontal flow to total gutter flow

Chart 3A (S.I.) and 3B (U.S. customary)—Conveyance in circular channels

Chart 4A (S.I.) and 4B (U.S. customary)—Velocity in triangular gutter sections

Chart 5A (S.I.) and 5B (U.S. customary)—Grate inlet frontal flow interception effi-
ciency

Chart 6A (S.I.) and 6B (U.S. customary)—Grate inlet side flow interception

capacity

Chart 7A (S.I.) and 7B (U.S. customary)—Curb-opening and slotted drain inlet

interception capacity

Chart 8A (S.I.) and 8B (U.S. customary)—Curb-opening and slotted drain inlet

interception capacity.

Chart 9A (S.I.) and 9B (U.S. customary)—Grate inlet capacity in sump conditions

Chart 10A (S.I.) and 10B (U.S. customary)—Depressed curb opening inlet in sump
locations

Chart 11A (S.I.) and 11B (U.S. customary)—Curb-opening inlet in sump locations

Chart 12A (S.I.) and 12B (U.S. customary)—Curb-opening inlet orifice capacity for
inclined and vertical orifice throats

Chart 13A (S.I.) and 13B (U.S. customary)—Slotted drain inlet capacity in sump
locations

Chart 14A (S.I.) and 14B (U.S. customary)—Solution of Manning’s equation for
channels of various side slopes

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-277

 Chart 15A (S.I.) and 15B (U.S. customary)—Ratio of frontal flow to total flow in a
trapezoidal channel

7-278 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-279

7-280 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-281

7-282 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-283

7-284 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-285

7-286 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-287

7-288 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-289

7-290 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-291

7-292 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-293

7-294 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-295

7-296 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-297

7-298 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-299

7-300 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-301

7-302 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-303

7-304 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 HEC 22 Charts

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 7-305

7-306 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide
 Chapter

Engineer’s Reference 8
This section includes:

• “Energy Equation” on page 8-307

• “Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation” on page 8-308
• “Roughness Values—Kutter’s Equation” on page 8-310
• “Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach (Colebrook-White) Equation” on page 8-
312
• “Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Formula” on page 8-313

8.1 Energy Equation

The energy relationship between the downstream and upstream end of a pipe is:

(8.1)

Where V = Fluid velocity (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)

g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)
P = Pressure (N/m.2, lb/ft2)
 = Specific weight of fluid (N/m.3, lb/ft3)
z = Elevation at centroid (m, ft)
hG = Headgain, such as from a pump (m, ft)

hL = Combined headloss (m, ft)

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 8-307

Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation

8.2 Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation

Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:

Table 8-1: Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed Metal Conduits

Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description

Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013

Steel; Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014

Steel; Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017

Cast iron; Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014

Cast iron; Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016

Wrought iron; Black 0.012 0.014 0.015

Wrought iron; Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017

Corrugated metal; Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021

Corrugated metal; Storm Drain 0.021 0.024 0.030

Table 8-2: Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description

Lucite 0.008 0.009 0.010

Glass 0.009 0.010 0.013

Cement; Neat, surface 0.010 0.011 0.013

Cement; Mortar 0.011 0.013 0.015

Concrete; Culvert, straight and 0.010 0.011 0.013

free of debris

Concrete; Culvert with bends, 0.011 0.013 0.014

connections, and some debris

Concrete; Finished 0.011 0.012 0.014

8-308 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Engineer’s Reference

Table 8-2: Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description

Concrete; Sewer with manholes, 0.013 0.015 0.017

inlet, etc., straight

Concrete; Unfinished, steel form 0.012 0.013 0.014

Concrete; Unfinished, smooth 0.012 0.014 0.016

wood form

Concrete; Unfinished, rough 0.015 0.017 0.020

wood form

Wood; Stave 0.010 0.012 0.014

Wood; Laminated, treated 0.015 0.017 0.020

Clay; Common drainage tile 0.011 0.013 0.017

Clay; Vitrified sewer 0.011 0.014 0.017

Clay; Vitrified sewer with 0.013 0.015 0.017

manholes, inlet, etc.

Clay; Vitrified subdrain with open 0.014 0.016 0.018

joint

Brickwork; Glazed 0.011 0.013 0.015

Brickwork; Lined with cement 0.012 0.013 0.016

mortar

Sanitary sewers coated with 0.012 0.013 0.016

sewage slimes, with bends and
connections

Paved invert, sewer, smooth 0.016 0.019 0.020

bottom

Rubble masonry, cemented 0.018 0.025 0.030

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 8-309

Roughness Values—Kutter’s Equation

8.3 Roughness Values—Kutter’s Equation

Table 8-3: Roughness Values—Kutter’s Equation

Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description

Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013

Steel; Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014

Steel; Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017

Cast iron; Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014

Cast iron; Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016

Wrought iron; Black 0.012 0.014 0.015

Wrought iron; Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017

Corrugated metal; Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021

Corrugated metal; Storm Drain 0.021 0.024 0.030

Table 8-4: Kutter’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum

Lucite 0.008 0.009 0.010

Glass 0.009 0.010 0.013

Cement; Neat, surface 0.010 0.011 0.013

Cement; Mortar 0.011 0.013 0.015

Concrete; Culvert, straight and free 0.010 0.011 0.013

of debris

Concrete; Culvert with bends, 0.011 0.013 0.014

connections, and some debris

Concrete; Finished 0.011 0.012 0.014

Concrete; Sewer with manholes, 0.013 0.015 0.017

inlet, etc., straight

8-310 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Engineer’s Reference

Table 8-4: Kutter’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum

Concrete; Unfinished, steel form 0.012 0.013 0.014

Concrete; Unfinished, smooth 0.012 0.014 0.016

wood form

Concrete; Unfinished, rough wood 0.015 0.017 0.020

form

Wood; Stave 0.010 0.012 0.014

Wood; Laminated, treated 0.015 0.017 0.020

Clay; Common drainage tile 0.011 0.013 0.017

Clay; Vitrified sewer 0.011 0.014 0.017

Clay; Vitrified sewer with manholes, 0.013 0.015 0.017

inlet, etc.

Clay; Vitrified subdrain with open 0.014 0.016 0.018

joint

Brickwork; Glazed 0.011 0.013 0.015

Brickwork; Lined with cement 0.011 0.013 0.015

mortar

Sanitary sewers coated with 0.012 0.013 0.016

sewage slimes, with bends and
connections

Paved invert, sewer, smooth 0.016 0.019 0.020

bottom

Rubble masonry, cemented 0.018 0.025 0.030

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 8-311

Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach (Colebrook-White) Equation

8.4 Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach

(Colebrook-White) Equation
Table 8-5: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits

Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)

Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005

Seamless commercial steel (new) 0.004 0.000013

Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016

Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015

Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015

Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004

Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005

Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085

Wood stave (new) 0.18 ~ 0.9 0.0006 ~

0.003

Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006

Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012

Concrete (rough, visible, form marks) 0.60 0.002

Riveted steel (new) 0.9 ~ 9.0 0.003 ~ 0.03

Corrugated metal 45 0.15

8-312 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Engineer’s Reference

8.5 Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams

Formula
Table 8-6: Hazen-Williams Coefficients

Pipe Material C

Asbestos cement 140

Brass 130 – 140

Brick Sewer 100

Cast iron; New, unlined 130

Cast iron; 10 yr. old 107 – 113

Cast iron; 20 yr. old 89 – 100

Cast iron; 30 yr. old 75 – 90

Cast iron; 40 yr. old 64 – 83

Concrete or concrete lined; Steel forms 140

Concrete or concrete lined; Wood forms 120

Concrete or concrete lined; Centrifugally spun 135

Copper 130 – 140

Galvanized iron 120

Glass 140

Lead 130 – 140

Plastic 140 – 150

Steel; Coal tar enamel, lined 145 – 150

Steel; New, unlined 140 – 150

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 8-313

Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Formula

Table 8-6: Hazen-Williams Coefficients (Continued)

Pipe Material C

Steel; Riveted 110

Tin 130

Vitrified clay (good condition) 110 – 140

Wood stave (average condition) 120

8-314 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Appendix

About Bentley 9
Systems

Bentley Systems, Incorporated provides software for the lifecycle of the world’s infra-
structure. The company’s comprehensive portfolio for the building, plant, civil, and
geospatial vertical markets spans architecture, engineering, construction (AEC) and
operations. Bentley is the leading provider of AEC software to the Engineering News-
Record Design 500 and major owner-operators. For more information, visit the
Bentley Web site at [Link]

Bentley Systems products offer software solutions to civil engineers throughout the
world for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic
systems, from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open chan-
nels, and more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality
output, Bentley Systems is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.

In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, five
of our products—SewerGEMS, CivilStorm, WaterCAD, StormCAD and
SewerCAD—can be totally integrated within MicroStation and/or AutoCAD. These
programs also share numerous powerful features, such as scenario management,
unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS,
database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation.

Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at [Link] to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.

9.1 Software
Bentley Systems software includes:

• “SewerGEMS”
• “CivilStorm”
• “WaterGEMS”
• “WaterCAD”
• “SewerCAD”

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 9-315

Software

• “StormCAD”
• “PondPack”
• “CulvertMaster”

9.1.1 SewerGEMS

SewerGEMS is the first and only fully-dynamic, multi-platform (MicroStation,

ArcGIS, AutoCAD, and Stand-Alone) sanitary and combined sewer modeling solu-
tion. With SewerGEMS, you will analyze all sanitary and combined sewer system
elements in one package and have the option of performing the analyses with the
SWMM algorithm or our own implicit solution of the full Saint Venant equations.

Simply put, SewerGEMS offers the most comprehensive solution available for opti-
mizing Best Management Practice (BMP) designs and meeting sanitary sewer over-
flow (SSO) and combined sewer overflow (CSO) regulations.

With SewerGEMS, you can:

• Develop system master plans

• Assess the impact of inflow and infiltration on SSOs
• Develop SSO and CSO remediation programs
• Perform system evaluations associated with US EPA CMOM and NPDES
• Optimize lift station and system storage capacities
• Determine developer connection fees
• Implement real-time control strategies
• Model relief sewers, overflow diversions, and inverted siphons
• Accurately simulate operations with variable-speed pumping and logical controls
• Simulate out-of-service or proposed sewers within the same model

9.1.2 CivilStorm

CivilStorm revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern

is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality
BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter designs
every day, CivilStorm fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software
package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. CivilStorm
also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM algorithm or
CivilStorm’s own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.

9-316 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 About Bentley Systems

CivilStorm provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.

Use CivilStorm For:

• Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans

• Watershed-Based Master Planning
• Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
• Floodplain Studies
• Complex Flow Regime Analysis
• Water Quality Assessments
• Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
• NPDES Permitting
CivilStorm is available with your choice of Stand-Alone graphical user interface,
MicroStation integrated interface, and an AutoCAD integrated interface.

9.1.3 WaterGEMS

WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advan-
tages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.

You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with tradi-
tional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in conjunction with the cross-
product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architec-
ture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.

WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: MicroStation, ArcView,

ArcEdit, ArcInfo, AutoCAD, or the stand-alone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 9-317

Software

9.1.4 WaterCAD

WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized pipe networks, such as
municipal water distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.

WaterCAD’s abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues,
with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehen-
sive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data sharing faculties.

WaterCAD is available with your choice of Stand-Alone graphical user interface,

MicroStation integrated interface, and an AutoCAD integrated interface.

9.1.5 SewerCAD

SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage
collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute
sanitary loads, tracking and combining loads from dry-weather and wet-weather
sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity
collection and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions,
and even automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers every-
thing from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.

SewerCAD is available with your choice of Stand-Alone graphical user interface,

MicroStation integrated interface, and an AutoCAD integrated interface.

9.1.6 StormCAD

StormCAD is a highly-efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flex-
ible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm sewer modeling.

Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity, and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.

StormCAD is available with your choice of Stand-Alone graphical user interface,

MicroStation integrated interface, and an AutoCAD integrated interface.

9-318 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 About Bentley Systems

9.1.7 PondPack

PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that

analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. Bentley FlowMaster analyzes pre- and postdeveloped watershed condi-
tions, and estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond
routing, and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple
outfalls, pond infiltration, and pond detention times.

PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, and automatically

creates section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly
create an executive summary for an entire watershed, or build an elaborate drainage
report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed
diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs are fully compatible with other Windows’s
software, such as AutoCAD.

9.1.8 CulvertMaster

CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single barrel crossings to complex multi-barrel culverts with
roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies,
and allow you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you don’t know, such as
culvert size, peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include
comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.

9.2 Bentley Press

Bentley Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable, quality refer-
ence and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering theory to
hydraulics and hydrology. Bentley Press publications include:

References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley

Press offers a complete line of reference books for
use in both academic and professional settings.
Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals
like “Current Methods” address the latest innovations
in water resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers: Bentley Press also provides funding for engineers to
write case studies of their projects, for potential
publication in a variety of industry journals and
magazines.

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide 9-319

Training

9.3 Training
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,
high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and varying levels of
application experience. Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your
productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is
developed concurrently with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest
tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certifica-
tion requirements.

The Bentley Institute offers complete training for Haestad Methods [Link]
training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to
apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations.

• Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an

assortment of teaching methods including:
• JumpStart Seminars
• Comprehensive Workshops
• Publication-Based Programs

To obtain more information about training for Bentley Systems products, or to see
upcoming events in a city near you, visit [Link]

9.4 Internet Resources

In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Bentley
Systems also provides Internet-based tools to help Haestad Methods products
customers manage their account information, manage their projects, and manage their
sanity.

Use the Check for Updates button to access instant software updates for
Bentley SELECT subscribers, etc. For more information, see “Contacting
Bentley Systems about Haestad Methods Products” on page 1-4.

9.4.1 Instant Account Management

Now you can go on-line to manage your own account information, such as to conve-
niently maintain your products, customize your communication settings, or indicate
your areas of interest. Just visit the accounts section at [Link]

9-320 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 Index

A C

AASHTO 183 calculation messages 38, 41, 44, 47, 48, 51, 54,
about dialog box 3 56, 59, 62, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73,
about the software 32 75, 78, 80, 82, 84, 87, 88, 90, 93
active grate length 78, 86, 96 calculation option 96
active grate weir length 75, 83, 92 carryover 171
actual flow depth 147 cascade 31
add and remove columns 124 categorized 105
adding and removing toolbar buttons 33 centroid elevation 70, 71, 72
address certification 320
See contacting Haestad Methods. 6 change the report title 124
adjusted discharge coefficient 69 channel 38, 41, 44, 48, 51
alphabetic 105 channel slope 39, 41, 42, 44, 47, 49, 51, 52, 54,
analysis menu 29 56, 59, 62, 64, 97
analysis toolbar 34 channel worksheets 38
aspect ratio 99 chart options 98, 122
attribute 112 charts: where to find them 183
Chézy 131
Chézy's 139
B Chézy’s equation 139
Cipoletti weir 67
background layer files Cipolletti 156
using with ProjectWise 116 circular channel 56
backwater analysis 152 circular orifice 71
batch print 26 CivilStorm 2005 316
Bentley Press 319 clogging 74, 77, 83, 85, 91, 95
Bentley SELECT 2, 5 close 28
Bentley Systems 315 close all 28, 31
about us 315 Colebatch 101
program update 2 Colebrook 134
training 320 Colebrook-White 139
bottom width 39, 44, 59, 82, 84, 97 Colebrook-White equation 143
boundary control depth 146 combination inlet in sag 90, 181
broad-crested weir 68, 158 combination inlet on grade 175
build number 3 combination inlet on grade worksheet 93
bypass flow 77, 81, 85, 89, 95, 171 composite cross slope 174
composite gutter section 166
conjugate depth 59
constructed depth 52
constructed top width 52

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Index-321

D

contacting Bentley Systems D

hours 5
contacting Haestad Methods Darcy-Weisbach 133, 139, 141, 143
email 6 Darcy-Weisbach formula 133
fax 6 date 105
mail 6 decimal point 104
sales 4 default unit system for new project 104
technical support 5 define rating curve 98, 122
telephone 6 define rating table 97
contents 31, 111 delete worksheet 29
continuity equation 130 depth 47, 74, 77, 79, 81, 83, 87, 89, 92, 95, 106
continuously depressed gutter 167 detailed report 29
contracted 154 diameter 55, 56, 71
copy 29 direct step 151
copy worksheet data 29 direct step method 151
cox 102 direction 40, 43
create new project 24 Discharge 68
create worksheet 24 discharge 39, 41, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 52, 54,
crest breadth 68 55, 57, 59, 60, 62, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70,
crest elevation 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 71, 72, 73, 76, 78, 80, 82, 84, 87, 88, 90, 93
crest length 65, 67, 68, 69 discharge coefficient 65, 67, 68, 70, 71, 72
crest surface type 68 discharge coefficient weir 69
critical 39, 52, 86, 135, 147 discharge full 57, 60, 63
critical depth 39, 42, 45, 52, 57, 60, 63, 86, 145, display precision 104
147 distance 106
critical elevation 49 ditch 82, 84, 168
critical flow 134, 144, 145 ditch inlet in sag 81
critical slope 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 57, 60, 63, 86, ditch inlet on grade 84
145, 146, 147 documentation 2
cross section 30, 99 downstream depth 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 58, 61, 64
cross-section 123 downstream velocity 41, 43, 46, 51, 54, 59, 61,
CulvertMaster 319 64
curb 79, 80, 92, 95 drainage 183, 184
curb inlet 96 duplicate worksheet 29
curb inlet in sag 177 dynamic help 31
curb inlet on grade 80
curb opening 174, 175
curb opening length 79, 80, 92, 95 E
curb throat type 79, 92
curves 98 edit column label 108
custom filter 109 edit column label dialog box 108
custom sort 108 edit menu 29
customizing tabular reports 124 edit section 48
customizing toolbars 33 editor 99
cut 29 efficiency 76, 80, 84, 89, 94
EGL 138
elevation 100
elevation at 1 54
elevation at 2 55

Index-322 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 F

elevation head 138, 163 friction method 48

elevation range 49 friction slope 55
elliptical pipe 62 front flow 96
email 6 frontal flow 77, 168
email address 6 frontal flow factor 77, 85, 96
end depth/rise 41, 43, 46, 51, 54, 59, 61, 64 frontwater analysis 153
end station 100 Froude 134
energy balance 150 Froude number 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 57, 60, 63, 86
energy equation 137, 162
energy grade 138
energy grade at 1 55 G
energy grade at 2 55
energy grade line 138 gate 161
energy principle 136 general 104, 112
engineer 105 generalized friction equation 129
engineering library 30 generic orifice 72
engineering library explorer 26 generic weir 69
entrance controlled 153 given downstream 40, 43, 46
equal length inlets 181 given upstream 40, 43, 46
equal side slopes 67 glossary 4
equivalent cross slope 81, 89, 96 gradually varied flow 46, 53, 58, 61, 63, 106,
139, 153
gradually varied flow analysis 12
F gradually varied profile 106
graph display options 98
family of curves 98 Grate 94
fax 6 grate 76, 82, 84, 91, 94, 175
field 112 grate flow option 96
field id 97 grate flow ratio 78, 86, 96
file menu 28 grate inlet 96
filename 105 grate inlet in sag 176
filter 108 grate inlet on grade 171
filtering tabular reports 126 grate length 74, 76, 82, 84, 91, 94
find 111 grate type 74, 76, 82, 85, 91, 94
fixed point 104, 112 grate width 74, 76, 82, 84, 91, 94
flexunits 104 gutter 73, 76, 78, 80, 87, 88, 90, 93
Flow 47 gutter cross slope 47, 73, 76, 79, 80, 87, 88, 90,
flow area 39, 42, 45, 47, 49, 52, 55, 57, 60, 62, 93
66, 67, 69, 71, 77, 81, 85, 89, 95, 107 gutter depression 48, 75, 77, 79, 81, 88, 89, 92,
flow depth 147 95, 167, 170
flow regime 144, 147 gutter flow 164
flow type 39, 52, 86 gutter width 47, 73, 76, 78, 80, 87, 88, 90, 93
format 104, 106, 112 GVF profile 30
formatter 104 GVF profile table 30
free surface flow 146
frequency 184
friction factor 40, 42, 45, 50, 53, 56, 58, 60, 63, H
134
friction loss 139 H3 147

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Index-323

I

Haestad Methods inlet capacity 164

about us 315 inlets in sag 176
email addresses 6 inlets on grade 170
program update 2 intercepted flow 77, 81, 85, 89, 95
training 320 invert elevation 107
Web site 6 irregular channel 99
Haestad Methods products 315 irregular section editor 48
Hazen-Williams 132, 139
Hazen-Williams Formula 132, 144
head gains 137 K
headloss 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 55, 58, 61, 64
headlosses 137 kinematic viscosity 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 55, 57,
headwater elevation 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 60, 62
72 KnowledgeBase 2
headwater height above centroid 70, 71, 72 Kutter’s 131, 139
headwater height above crest 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 Kutter’s equation 140
HEC-12 183 Kutter’s formula 131
HEC-22 164
height 59
help menu 31 L
help toolbar 36
HGL 138, 163 left-side slope 42, 44, 82, 84, 97
HGL convergence test 138 Length 81
highway 183, 184 length 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 55, 58, 61, 64
horizontal 177 length factor 81, 90, 96
horizontal throat 79, 92 license 2
horton’s 101 load 104
how do i? 32 local depression 74, 79, 81, 82, 87, 89, 91, 94,
hydraulic grade 138, 163 170
hydraulic grade at 1 55 local depression width 74, 79, 81, 82, 87, 89, 91,
hydraulic grade at 2 55 94
hydraulic grade line 138 Lotter 102
hydraulic head 138
hydraulic jump 153
hydraulic jumps 151
M
hydraulically mild slope 146, 147
hydraulically steep slope 146, 147 M3 147
mail 6
main window 24
I Manning's equation 140
Manning’s 131, 139
improved Lotter 103 Manning’s coefficient 100
inclined 177 Manning’s formula 131
inclined throat 79, 92 Mannings coefficient 47, 76, 84, 88, 93
increment 97, 98 manual scale 99
independent papers 319 material libraries 26
index 31 materials 26
inlet 73, 75, 78, 80, 81, 84, 86, 88, 90, 91, 93, maximum 97, 98
94, 96 maximum discharge 57

Index-324 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 N

median section 168 ProjectWise tab 105

menus 27 orifice 70, 71, 72
messages 38, 41, 44, 47, 48, 51, 54, 56, 59, 62, orifice coefficients 161
65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 75, 78, 80, orifice flow 177, 179, 181
82, 84, 87, 88, 90, 93 overtopping 159
mild 147
mild-1 147
minimize all 31 P
minimum 97, 98
mixed flow profiles 151 parabolic channel 51
moving toolbars 34 parameter 104
multiple page view 111 paste 29
Municipal License Administrator 2 pavement 183
pavement drainage 164
Pavlovskii’s 100
N percent full 57, 60, 63
performance curves 122
next page 111 piezometer 163
non-sharp-crested 153 pipe 54, 56, 59, 62
normal depth 39, 42, 44, 49, 52, 56, 59, 62, 97, pitot tube 138, 163
145, 146, 147 plot 98
normal depth/rise 41, 43, 46, 51, 54, 59, 61, 64 PondPack
normal flow 144 build number 3
notch angle 66 upgrade 2
notes 38, 41, 44, 47, 48, 51, 54, 56, 59, 62, 65, version number 3
66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 75, 78, 80, 82, power 104
84, 87, 88, 90, 93, 105 precision 112
number 104, 112 pressure at 1 54
number of contractions 65 pressure at 2 54
number of steps 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 58, 61, 64 pressure flow 144, 145
pressure head 138, 163
pressure pipe 162
O pressure pipe channel 54
preview 111
open 28 previous page 111
open channel weighting methods 100 print 28, 111
open existing project 24 print preview 28, 97, 98, 106, 111
open grate area 75, 83, 92 print selected worksheets 26
open slot area 88 print setup 28
open the registration dialog box 3 printing reports 123
opening area 72 prismatic 145
opening height 70, 79, 92 profile 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 58, 61, 64
opening width 70 profile classification 40, 146, 147
optimize 138 profile description 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 49, 50, 53,
options 48, 96, 99, 112 57, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64
Options Dialog Box Program Maintenance Dialog Box 2
ProjectWise settings 105 project 8, 24, 28
options dialog box project components 24
flexunits tab 104 project explorer 24, 30

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Index-325

Q

printing a worksheet from 25 right-side slope 42, 44, 82, 84, 97

project file 106 rise 62
project filename 106 Road 79
project files 26 road cross slope 47, 73, 76, 79, 80, 87, 88, 90, 93
Projectname.fm8 26 roughness coefficient 38, 41, 44, 49, 51, 55, 56,
[Link] 26 59, 62, 80, 97, 140
ProjectWise 28, 113 roughness method 100
closing projects 113 runoff 184
general guidelines for using 113
using background layer files with 116
viewing status in FlowMaster 114 S
ProjectWise change datasource 28
ProjectWise open 28 S3 147
ProjectWise options 105 sales 4
ProjectWise save as 28 save 28
properties 29, 105 save all 28
publications 319 save as 28
scientific 104, 112
sealing conditions 151
Q search 32
section 47
quick filter 108 section geometry 99
section plot 100
segment roughness 100
R services 32
settings 111
rapidly varied flow 151 SewerCAD 318
rating curve 30, 98 SewerGEMS 316
rating curves 121, 122 sharp-crested 153
rating table 29, 97 sharp-crested V-notched weirs 156
recent projects 29 sharp-crested weir 153, 157
rectangular 154 SI 104
rectangular orifice 70 side flow 96
rectangular weir 65 side flow factor 77, 85, 96
rectangular worksheet 38 single curve 98
redo 29 single page view 111
references and textbooks 319 slope 47, 76, 80, 84, 88, 93, 146
release notes 32 slope classification 146, 147
report title 99, 123 slope full 57, 60, 63
reporting 15 slot 87, 89
reports slot inlet in sag 180
about worksheets 123 slot length 87, 89
printing 123 slot width 87
reset defaults SI 104 slotted-drain inlet in sag 86
reset defaults US 104 slotted-drain inlet on grade 88
reset filter 109 slotted-inlet on grade 175
results 15 sluice gate 161
Reynolds number 40, 42, 45, 50, 53, 56, 58, 60, software
63, 133 upgrades 2

Index-326 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide

 T

Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SE- filtering 126
LECT 2 moving columns 124
solve for 48 resizing columns 124
sort 108 sort 108
sort ascending 108 tailwater condition 146
sort descending 108 tailwater elevation 65, 66, 67, 68, 70, 71, 72
span 62 tailwater height above centroid 71, 72
specific energy 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 57, 60, 63, 86, tailwater height above crest 66, 67, 68
107, 134 technical journals 319
specific weight 55 technical support 5
splash over velocity 77, 85, 95 TeeChart editor 98
spread 47, 73, 77, 78, 81, 82, 87, 89, 90, 95 The 320
standard step 139, 151 throat 79, 92
standard step method 151 throat-incline angle 79, 92
standard toolbar 34 tile horizontally 31
start station 100 tile vertically 31
station 100 toolbars 30, 32
status bar 30 adding and removing buttons 33
steep 147 customizing 33
StormCAD 318 moving 34
subcritical 39, 52, 86, 135, 147 tools menu 31
subcritical flow 144, 146 top width 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 57, 60, 63, 66, 67,
submerged 157 68, 69, 70, 83, 85
submergence correction 159 total depression 75, 77, 79, 81, 88, 89, 92, 95
submergence factor 69 total interception length 81, 90, 96
suggestions 6 training 320
supercritical 39, 52, 86, 135, 153 transition flow 180
supercritical flow 144, 146 transitional flow 177, 181
support 5 Troubleshooting 2
addresses 6 troubleshooting
suppressed 154 knowledge database 2
surcharging conditions 151 tutorials 7
Swamee and Jain equation 143
sweeper inlet 182
U
T U.S. customary 104
undo 29
tabular 106 uniform flow 44, 48, 51, 56, 62, 73, 129, 144,
tabular report 107 145
tabular report setup dialog box 109 uniform gutter cross slope 164
tabular reports 30 unit 104, 112
adding and removing columns 124 units and formatting 108
changing columns headings 124 updating PondPack via the Web 2
changing the report title 124 upgrade
copying and pasting data 124 PondPack 2
customizing 124 upstream depth 40, 43, 46, 50, 53, 58, 61, 64
edit column label 108 upstream velocity 41, 44, 47, 51, 54, 59, 62, 64
filter 108 using the software 32

Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide Index-327

V

using with FlowMaster 113 zoom out 111

varying 98
velocity 39, 42, 45, 48, 49, 52, 55, 57, 60, 63,
66, 67, 68, 69, 71, 72, 77, 81, 85, 89, 95, 107
velocity head 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 55, 57, 60, 63,
86, 138, 163
version number 3
vertical 177
vertical throat 79, 92
view menu 30
V-notch weir 66
v-notch weir coefficient 66
vs 98

water surface elevation 49

WaterCAD 318
WaterGEMS 317
Web site 6
Web updates 2
weighted roughness 48
weir 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 153
weir flow 177, 178, 180
welcome 24
welcome dialog box 32
wetted perimeter 39, 42, 45, 49, 52, 55, 57, 60,
63, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 83, 85, 107
where to find charts 183
window menu 31
worksheet 7, 24, 28
workspace 24
World Wide Web
See Web. 2

zone 1 147
zone 2 147
zone 3 147
zone classification 146, 147
zoom 111
zoom in 111

Index-328 Bentley FlowMaster User’s Guide